1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
18 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
20 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
21 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
22 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
23 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
25 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
29 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
30 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
32 % for customized page headers/footers
33 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
35 % change header rule width
36 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
38 % used to have extra space in table cells
39 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
40 {\usepackage{array}}{}
41 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
43 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
44 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
45 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
47 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
50 \use_default_options false
55 \maintain_unincluded_children false
57 \language_package default
60 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
61 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
62 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
63 \font_math "auto" "auto"
64 \font_default_family default
65 \use_non_tex_fonts false
68 \font_sf_scale 100 100
69 \font_tt_scale 100 100
71 \default_output_format default
73 \bibtex_command bibtex
74 \index_command default
78 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
79 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
83 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
84 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
85 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
90 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
91 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
94 \use_package amsmath 1
95 \use_package amssymb 1
98 \use_package mathdots 1
99 \use_package mathtools 0
100 \use_package mhchem 1
101 \use_package stackrel 0
102 \use_package stmaryrd 0
103 \use_package undertilde 0
105 \cite_engine_type default
109 \paperorientation portrait
113 \notefontcolor #0000ff
130 \paragraph_separation skip
132 \quotes_language english
135 \paperpagestyle default
136 \tracking_changes false
137 \output_changes false
151 by the \SpecialChar LyX
156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
158 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
159 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
160 Documentation mailing list:
161 \begin_inset CommandInset href
163 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
174 \begin_inset Newline newline
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Note Note
185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
186 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
193 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
201 \begin_layout Standard
202 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
203 LatexCommand tableofcontents
210 \begin_layout Chapter
214 \begin_layout Section
215 What is \SpecialChar LyX
219 \begin_layout Standard
221 is a document preparation system.
222 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
223 scripts, publishable books, business
224 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
225 It is unlike most other
226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
233 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
235 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
251 pt type, left justified, 5
252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
281 's philosophy: most importantly,
282 the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
298 \begin_layout Standard
299 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
300 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
302 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
303 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
309 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
310 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
312 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
313 only a vertical scrollbar.
314 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
315 The first case is large images.
316 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
317 image and use the option
328 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
331 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
332 this doesn't work for equations yet.
335 \begin_layout Standard
336 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
337 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
345 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
352 \begin_layout Section
356 \begin_layout Standard
357 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
359 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
361 Just select the manual you want to read from the
368 \begin_layout Section
369 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
373 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
382 can be configured via the menu
384 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
388 \begin_inset Index idx
391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
398 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
400 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
401 packages are available.
402 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
404 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
406 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
411 \begin_inset space \space{}
414 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
415 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
417 To force \SpecialChar LyX
418 to re-inspect your system, you should use
420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
424 \begin_inset Index idx
427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
428 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
434 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
435 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
438 \begin_layout Section
441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
443 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
450 \begin_layout Standard
451 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
452 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 installed, but you will not be
454 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
455 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
456 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
457 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
458 document can always be output as plain text
462 \begin_layout Standard
463 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 or DocBook classes or packages.
465 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
466 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
472 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
475 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
483 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
484 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 \begin_inset Note Note
494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
495 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
496 Code box prevent that the term
497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
505 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
506 More about \SpecialChar TeX
507 Code is described in section
512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
514 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
518 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 is explained in section
524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
526 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
536 \begin_inset Index idx
539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
546 See section 5.1 of the
550 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
554 \begin_layout Chapter
555 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
559 \begin_layout Section
560 Basic File Operations
561 \begin_inset Index idx
564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
573 \begin_layout Standard
578 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
579 in addition to some more advanced operations:
582 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
620 arg "buffer-new-template"
626 \begin_layout Itemize
648 \begin_layout Itemize
658 \begin_layout Itemize
672 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
706 arg "buffer-write-as"
712 \begin_layout Itemize
726 \begin_layout Itemize
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
742 a few minor differences.
745 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
756 command lists the available templates.
757 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
758 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
759 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
767 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
774 \begin_layout Standard
775 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
807 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
808 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
809 is just that — a big, blank space.
817 \begin_layout Standard
838 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
843 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
846 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
864 will reload the document from disk.
865 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
866 and want to restore it to the last save.
875 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
876 them as your changes.
879 \begin_layout Section
880 Basic Editing Features
881 \begin_inset Index idx
884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
893 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
900 \begin_layout Standard
901 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
902 can perform cut and paste operations
903 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
904 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
905 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
906 editing features and how to access
908 We will start with cut and paste.
911 \begin_layout Standard
912 As you might expect, the
916 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
917 various other editing features.
918 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
922 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 \begin_layout Itemize
966 \begin_inset Index idx
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset Index idx
1007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1032 \begin_layout Itemize
1036 \begin_inset space ~
1042 \begin_layout Itemize
1046 \begin_inset space ~
1052 \begin_layout Itemize
1056 \begin_inset space ~
1060 \begin_inset space ~
1066 \begin_inset Index idx
1069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1078 \begin_inset Index idx
1081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1096 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1106 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1112 \begin_layout Standard
1113 The first three are self-explanatory.
1114 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1115 and other programs by
1136 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1137 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1142 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1143 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1144 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1145 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1146 into individual cells.
1150 \begin_inset space ~
1155 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1156 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1160 \begin_layout Standard
1164 \begin_inset space ~
1169 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1171 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1186 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1187 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1188 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1194 \begin_inset space \space{}
1197 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1198 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1204 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1206 \begin_inset space ~
1210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1223 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1224 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1226 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1230 \begin_inset space ~
1235 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1236 start a new paragraph.
1237 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1238 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1246 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1266 paste from the primary selection.
1267 This is normally the currently selected text.
1270 \begin_layout Standard
1273 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1287 \begin_inset space ~
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1297 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1303 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 button to skip the current word.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1333 \begin_inset space ~
1338 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1340 If the toggle is set, searching for
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1352 will not match the word
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 Match whole words only
1369 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1370 to only find complete words, e.
1371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1400 offers also an advanced
1403 \begin_inset space ~
1407 \begin_inset space ~
1412 feature that is described in sec.
1413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1419 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1426 \begin_layout Standard
1427 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1428 \begin_inset space \space{}
1432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1440 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1442 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1447 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1454 \begin_layout Standard
1458 arg "inset-select-all"
1461 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1462 When the cursor is inside an inset
1465 arg "inset-select-all"
1468 selects the content of the inset.
1472 arg "inset-select-all"
1475 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1480 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1483 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1487 \begin_layout Section
1489 \begin_inset Index idx
1492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1499 \begin_inset Index idx
1502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1511 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1518 \begin_layout Standard
1519 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1521 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1524 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1527 or the toolbar button
1533 to undo some mistake.
1534 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1539 or the toolbar button
1546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1553 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1554 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1557 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1560 \begin_layout Standard
1561 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1570 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1571 This is a consequence of the 100
1572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1575 step undo limit mentioned above.
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1587 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1589 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1593 \begin_layout Section
1595 \begin_inset Index idx
1598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1607 \begin_layout Standard
1608 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1611 \begin_layout Enumerate
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1621 once anywhere in the edit window.
1622 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 \begin_layout Itemize
1638 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1644 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1645 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1648 \begin_layout Itemize
1649 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1652 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1659 \begin_layout Enumerate
1660 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1664 \begin_layout Standard
1665 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1666 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1670 \begin_layout Section
1672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1674 name "sec:Navigating"
1679 \begin_inset Index idx
1682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1691 \begin_layout Standard
1693 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1696 \begin_layout Itemize
1701 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1702 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1705 \begin_layout Itemize
1706 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1708 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 \begin_inset space ~
1715 or by the toolbar button
1718 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1725 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1727 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1730 and use the same menu to return to them.
1731 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1734 \begin_layout Standard
1738 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1743 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1744 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1746 \begin_inset space ~
1751 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1752 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1753 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1754 your last editing position.
1757 \begin_layout Standard
1762 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1766 \begin_layout Subsection
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1770 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1777 \begin_layout Standard
1778 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1779 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1780 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1792 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1799 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1804 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1808 \begin_layout Standard
1809 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1810 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1811 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1812 dialog and to modify the citation.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1818 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1819 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1827 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1830 \begin_layout Standard
1831 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1832 you further to control the display.
1837 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1838 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1844 option keeps it in the current view state.
1845 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 3, the subsections of sections
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1857 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1862 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1863 \begin_inset space ~
1867 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1877 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1887 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1888 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1902 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1903 So, for example, you can move section
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1911 2.4 or after section
1912 \begin_inset space ~
1917 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1930 (or the corresponding key bindings
1938 ) you can change the level of sections.
1939 So you can for example make section
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1954 \begin_layout Section
1955 Input/Word Completion
1956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1958 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1963 \begin_inset Index idx
1966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1973 \begin_inset Index idx
1976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2007 \begin_layout Standard
2009 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2011 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2012 is used to propose completions.
2015 \begin_layout Standard
2016 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2019 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2024 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2040 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2044 \begin_inset space ~
2049 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2050 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2054 \begin_inset space ~
2060 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2061 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2062 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2063 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2066 \begin_layout Standard
2068 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2069 completions available.
2074 key to accept a proposed completion.
2075 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2076 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2077 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2084 \begin_layout Standard
2085 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2086 ing options for text.
2087 The special math option
2091 enables characters to be composed.
2092 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2093 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2096 , you can then input the characters
2097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 to a formula to get it.
2109 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2110 of the math toolbar.
2111 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2115 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2116 's installation folder.
2117 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2126 \begin_layout Section
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_inset Index idx
2173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2204 \begin_layout Standard
2205 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2219 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2222 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2226 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2233 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2244 \begin_inset space ~
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2273 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2277 \begin_layout Labeling
2278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2282 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2283 LatexCommand nomenclature
2285 description "Tabulator key"
2291 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2293 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2294 \begin_inset space ~
2298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2300 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2307 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2311 , especially section
2312 \begin_inset space ~
2316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2318 reference "subsec:Lists"
2324 If you are still confused, look in the
2329 \begin_inset Newline newline
2337 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2338 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2342 \begin_layout Labeling
2343 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2347 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2348 LatexCommand nomenclature
2350 description "Escape key"
2357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2364 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2365 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2368 \begin_layout Labeling
2369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2375 \begin_inset space ~
2379 \begin_inset space ~
2386 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2387 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2391 \begin_layout Standard
2392 There are three modifier keys:
2395 \begin_layout Labeling
2396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2414 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2415 LatexCommand nomenclature
2417 description "Control key"
2421 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2422 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2426 \begin_layout Itemize
2435 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2438 \begin_layout Itemize
2447 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2450 \begin_layout Itemize
2459 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2463 \begin_layout Labeling
2464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2482 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2483 LatexCommand nomenclature
2485 description "Shift key"
2489 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2490 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2493 \begin_layout Labeling
2494 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2512 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2513 LatexCommand nomenclature
2515 description "Alt or Meta key"
2519 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2520 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2521 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2527 \begin_inset Newline newline
2530 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2532 menu accelerator keys
2535 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2536 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2540 \begin_layout Standard
2541 For example, the sequence
2542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2558 \begin_inset space ~
2566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset space ~
2591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2601 \begin_layout Standard
2606 manual lists all other things bound to the
2614 \begin_layout Standard
2615 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2617 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2618 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2619 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2620 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2621 The \SpecialChar LyX
2622 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2623 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2624 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2626 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2642 followed by a capital
2649 \begin_layout Chapter
2652 \begin_inset Index idx
2655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2665 \begin_layout Section
2667 \begin_inset Index idx
2670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2679 \begin_layout Subsection
2683 \begin_layout Standard
2684 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2685 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2686 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2687 numbering schemes, and so on.
2688 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2689 and format the title of your document differently.
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2697 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2698 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2699 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2700 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2701 picks one for you by default.
2702 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2705 \begin_layout Subsection
2707 \begin_inset Index idx
2710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2719 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2726 \begin_layout Standard
2727 You can select a class using the
2729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2734 \begin_inset Index idx
2737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2744 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2752 \begin_layout Standard
2753 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2758 \begin_layout Description
2759 Article for basic articles
2762 \begin_layout Description
2763 Report for basic reports
2766 \begin_layout Description
2767 Book for writing a book
2770 \begin_layout Description
2771 Letter for US-style letters
2774 \begin_layout Standard
2775 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2776 only uses if you have installed
2777 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2778 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2779 distributions will include
2781 Here are some of the classes.
2782 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2784 Special Document Classes
2793 \begin_layout Description
2794 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2807 \begin_layout Description
2808 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2809 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2810 There are three article layouts available.
2811 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2812 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2813 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2814 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2819 sequential numbering
2820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2823 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2824 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2825 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2826 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2829 \begin_layout Description
2830 Beamer Layout for presentations
2833 \begin_layout Description
2834 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2835 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2836 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2837 with \SpecialChar LyX
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2845 \begin_layout Description
2847 \begin_inset space ~
2850 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2853 \begin_layout Description
2854 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2857 \begin_layout Description
2858 Foils Used to make transparencies
2861 \begin_layout Description
2862 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2863 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2864 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2865 with \SpecialChar LyX
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2871 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2874 \begin_layout Description
2875 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2878 \begin_layout Description
2879 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2882 \begin_layout Description
2883 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2884 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2885 (Is used by this document.)
2888 \begin_layout Description
2889 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2892 \begin_layout Description
2893 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2896 \begin_layout Description
2901 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2902 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2904 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2908 \begin_layout Description
2909 Slides Used to make transparencies
2912 \begin_layout Description
2914 \begin_inset space ~
2917 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2918 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2925 \begin_layout Standard
2926 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2928 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2934 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2935 of the document classes.
2938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2942 \begin_layout Standard
2943 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2945 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2946 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2968 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2969 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2971 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2974 \begin_layout Standard
2977 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
2982 , are highly specialized.
2984 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
2985 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
2986 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
2987 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2988 by some document class.
2989 There are just too many of them.
2990 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3003 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3004 document class for a new file.
3006 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3011 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3020 manual for information on how to install them.
3021 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3027 \begin_layout Standard
3028 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3029 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3030 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3031 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3032 class files to be used for dissertation
3033 s submitted to those universities.
3034 The \SpecialChar LyX
3035 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3037 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3041 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3047 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3054 name "subsec:Modules"
3059 \begin_inset Index idx
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3071 \begin_layout Standard
3072 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3073 chosen document class.
3074 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3075 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3082 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3086 \begin_inset Index idx
3089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3096 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3100 \begin_layout Standard
3101 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3102 packages or file format converters that are not always
3103 installed by default.
3105 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3106 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3107 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3108 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3110 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3111 file without the missing prerequisites.
3112 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3113 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3120 \begin_inset Index idx
3123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3124 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3134 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3143 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3155 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3157 will advise you about these things.
3165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3169 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3174 \begin_inset Index idx
3177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3178 Document ! Local Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3187 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3188 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3189 : They are intended to be used in
3190 a variety of different documents.
3191 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3192 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3193 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3194 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3195 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3215 manual for information on how to use it.
3218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3222 \begin_layout Standard
3223 Each class has a default set of options.
3224 Here's a quick table describing them:
3227 \begin_layout Standard
3228 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3234 \begin_layout Standard
3236 \begin_inset Tabular
3237 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3238 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3239 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3240 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3241 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3242 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3697 \begin_layout Standard
3698 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3704 \begin_layout Standard
3705 You're probably also wondering what
3706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3718 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3719 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3724 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3729 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3739 headings, there are also
3747 headings, and so on.
3748 We will describe these headings fully in section
3749 \begin_inset space ~
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3755 reference "subsec:Headings"
3762 \begin_layout Subsection
3764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3766 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3771 \begin_inset Index idx
3774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 \begin_inset Index idx
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3793 \begin_layout Standard
3794 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3796 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3803 \begin_inset space ~
3811 \begin_inset space ~
3816 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3818 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3819 doesn't support special options you want to
3820 use for your document.
3821 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3822 -class and its options, you have to read
3826 \begin_layout Standard
3830 \begin_inset space ~
3837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3843 \begin_inset space ~
3848 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3849 You can choose between the following five options:
3852 \begin_layout Labeling
3853 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3858 Use default page style of current class.
3861 \begin_layout Labeling
3862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3867 No page numbers or headings.
3870 \begin_layout Labeling
3871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3879 \begin_layout Labeling
3880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3885 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3886 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3887 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3888 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3891 \begin_layout Labeling
3892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3897 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3898 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3904 \begin_inset Index idx
3907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3909 -packages ! fancyhdr
3915 How they are defined is explained in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3929 \begin_layout Standard
3930 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3931 \begin_inset space ~
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3937 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3944 \begin_layout Subsection
3945 Paper Size and Orientation
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 Document ! Paper size
3956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3958 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3965 \begin_layout Standard
3966 You can find the following options in the menu
3969 \begin_inset space ~
3976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3980 \begin_inset Index idx
3983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3992 \begin_layout Labeling
3993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 What size paper to print on.
4007 \begin_layout Itemize
4013 \begin_layout Itemize
4019 \begin_layout Itemize
4025 \begin_layout Itemize
4031 \begin_layout Itemize
4034 US letter, US legal, US executive
4037 \begin_layout Itemize
4043 \begin_layout Itemize
4050 \begin_layout Labeling
4051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4056 To choose whether to output as
4067 \begin_layout Labeling
4068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4072 \begin_inset space ~
4077 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4078 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4081 \begin_layout Subsection
4083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4085 name "subsec:Margins"
4090 \begin_inset Index idx
4093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4112 \begin_layout Standard
4113 Paper margins are set in the menu
4115 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4119 \begin_inset Index idx
4122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4131 \begin_layout Standard
4132 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4133 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4134 the paper format and the font size into account.
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4148 That includes the paragraph environments.
4149 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4150 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4151 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4153 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4162 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4164 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4165 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4166 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4169 \begin_layout Section
4170 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4171 \begin_inset Index idx
4174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4175 Paragraph ! Indentation
4183 \begin_layout Subsection
4185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4187 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4194 \begin_layout Standard
4195 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4196 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4199 \begin_layout Standard
4200 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4201 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4202 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4203 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4207 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4213 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4214 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4215 language than English.
4217 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4220 \begin_layout Standard
4221 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4222 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4223 into \SpecialChar LyX
4225 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4228 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4230 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4231 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4232 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4239 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4240 goes to produce a printable file.
4245 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4247 gives you the ability globally to change
4251 these pre-coded spacings.
4252 We will explain more later.
4255 \begin_layout Subsection
4256 Paragraph Separation
4257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4259 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 Paragraph ! Separation
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4284 \begin_inset space ~
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4303 \begin_inset Index idx
4306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4312 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4315 \begin_layout Subsection
4319 \begin_layout Standard
4320 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4325 \begin_inset space ~
4330 dialog and toggle the
4333 \begin_inset space ~
4338 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4341 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4345 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4346 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4350 \begin_layout Standard
4351 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4352 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4355 \begin_layout Subsection
4357 \begin_inset Index idx
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4361 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4376 \begin_inset Index idx
4379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4388 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4392 \begin_inset space ~
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4402 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4408 \begin_inset Index idx
4411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 -packages ! setspace
4418 installed to use this feature.
4423 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4427 \begin_inset space ~
4432 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4433 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4436 \begin_layout Section
4437 Paragraph Environments
4438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4440 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4445 \begin_inset Index idx
4448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4449 Paragraph ! Environments
4455 \begin_inset Index idx
4458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4459 Paragraph environments|(
4467 \begin_layout Subsection
4471 \begin_layout Standard
4472 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4475 \begin_layout Standard
4494 \begin_inset Newline newline
4497 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4499 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4500 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4501 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4510 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4513 \begin_layout Standard
4514 A paragraph environment is simply a
4515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4522 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4523 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4524 scheme, labels, and so on.
4525 Additionally, you can
4526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4533 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4534 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4535 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4536 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4538 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4540 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4543 \begin_layout Standard
4544 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4545 \begin_inset Graphics
4546 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4552 at the left end of the toolbar.
4554 will change the environment of the
4558 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4559 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4560 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4564 \begin_layout Standard
4573 create a new paragraph using the
4577 paragraph environment.
4579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4586 because if you are in one of these environments:
4589 \begin_layout Itemize
4595 \begin_layout Itemize
4601 \begin_layout Itemize
4607 \begin_layout Itemize
4613 \begin_layout Itemize
4619 \begin_layout Itemize
4625 \begin_layout Itemize
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4633 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4637 , rather than resetting it to
4642 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4643 \begin_inset space ~
4647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4649 reference "sec:Nesting"
4656 \begin_layout Subsection
4660 \begin_layout Standard
4661 The default paragraph environment is
4666 It creates a plain paragraph.
4668 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4669 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4670 this manual) are in the
4677 \begin_layout Standard
4678 You can nest a paragraph using the
4682 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4690 \begin_layout Subsection
4692 \begin_inset Index idx
4695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4704 \begin_layout Standard
4705 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4706 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4715 for thanks or contact information.
4716 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4717 places all of this on a separate page
4718 along with today's date.
4719 For other types of documents, the title
4720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4727 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4733 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4747 Here's how you use them:
4750 \begin_layout Itemize
4751 Put the title of your document in the
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4759 Put the author name in the
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4768 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4774 Note that using this environment is optional.
4775 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4776 will automatically insert today's date.
4777 If you don't want a date, use the option
4779 Suppress default date on front page
4783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4786 \begin_inset space ~
4794 \begin_layout Standard
4795 You can use footnotes to insert
4796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4803 or contact information.
4806 \begin_layout Subsection
4808 \begin_inset Index idx
4811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4820 name "subsec:Headings"
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4830 takes care of the numbering for you.
4833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4835 \begin_inset Index idx
4838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4839 Section headings ! Numbered
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4852 \begin_layout Enumerate
4858 \begin_layout Enumerate
4864 \begin_layout Enumerate
4870 \begin_layout Enumerate
4876 \begin_layout Enumerate
4882 \begin_layout Enumerate
4888 \begin_layout Enumerate
4894 \begin_layout Standard
4896 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4897 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4898 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4901 \begin_layout Standard
4902 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4903 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4904 You group the book into chapters.
4906 does a similar grouping:
4909 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 is divided into either
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4949 \begin_layout Itemize
4961 \begin_layout Itemize
4973 \begin_layout Itemize
4985 \begin_layout Standard
4986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4994 Not all document types use the
4998 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5003 is the top-level heading.
5011 \begin_layout Standard
5016 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5017 labels it with its number,
5018 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5020 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5034 \begin_inset Index idx
5037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5038 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5047 The unnumbered section headings have a
5048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5055 at the end of their name.
5056 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5057 the table of contents, see section
5058 \begin_inset space ~
5062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5072 Changing the Numbering
5073 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5075 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5082 \begin_layout Standard
5083 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5084 in the Table of Contents.
5085 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5087 Just as certain classes start with
5101 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5111 This is something you can change.
5114 \begin_layout Standard
5117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5121 \begin_inset Index idx
5124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5137 \begin_inset space ~
5142 you will see two counters.
5147 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5148 numbers a section heading.
5149 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5154 Short Titles of Headings
5155 \begin_inset Index idx
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5159 Section headings ! Short titles
5165 \begin_inset Argument 1
5168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5177 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5184 \begin_layout Standard
5185 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5186 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5187 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5188 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5191 \begin_layout Standard
5193 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5194 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5195 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5196 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5201 \begin_inset space ~
5207 This will insert a box labeled
5208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5219 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5220 This also works for captions inside floats.
5221 There can only be one short title per title.
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5232 \begin_layout Standard
5233 The following information applies to all section headings:
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5237 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5240 \begin_layout Itemize
5241 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5244 \begin_layout Itemize
5245 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5248 \begin_layout Itemize
5249 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5252 \begin_layout Subsection
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5272 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5273 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5274 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5275 the text they contain.
5276 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5284 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5287 \begin_layout Standard
5288 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5297 when you start a new paragraph.
5298 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5302 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5303 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5304 have to change back to the
5308 environment yourself.
5311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5320 \begin_inset Index idx
5323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5332 \begin_layout Standard
5333 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5334 time for the differences.
5343 are identical except for one difference:
5347 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5356 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 Here's an example of the
5373 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5375 See – no indentation!
5379 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5380 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5381 the other paragraph.
5384 \begin_layout Standard
5385 Here's another example, this time in the
5392 \begin_layout Quotation
5398 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5399 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5400 the first line, then
5404 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5408 you were quoting other text.
5411 \begin_layout Quotation
5412 Here's a new paragraph.
5413 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5414 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5417 \begin_layout Standard
5418 As the examples show,
5422 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5423 They should put quotes in the
5428 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5432 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5437 \begin_inset Index idx
5440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset Index idx
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5466 \begin_layout Standard
5471 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5477 \begin_inset Newline newline
5480 Which I did not rehearse!
5484 It could be much worse.
5485 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5487 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5488 indented a bit more than the first.
5489 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5495 \begin_inset Newline newline
5498 And make things look fine
5499 \begin_inset Newline newline
5505 arg "newline-insert newline"
5511 \begin_layout Standard
5516 does not indent both margins.
5517 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5518 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5521 arg "newline-insert newline"
5527 \begin_layout Subsection
5529 \begin_inset Index idx
5532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5548 \begin_layout Standard
5550 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5560 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5561 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5570 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5571 lets you provide your own label.
5572 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5573 describing some general features of all four of them.
5576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5580 \begin_layout Standard
5581 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5583 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5584 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5593 reset the environment to
5597 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5598 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5599 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5607 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5614 \begin_layout Standard
5615 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5616 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5617 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5619 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5620 you read all of section
5621 \begin_inset space ~
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5627 reference "sec:Nesting"
5634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5636 \begin_inset Index idx
5639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5655 \begin_layout Standard
5656 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5660 paragraph environment.
5661 It has the following properties:
5664 \begin_layout Itemize
5665 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5671 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5674 \begin_layout Itemize
5675 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5679 \begin_layout Itemize
5680 The items can have any length.
5682 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5683 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5690 \begin_layout Itemize
5695 environment inside another
5699 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5709 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5714 \begin_inset space ~
5718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5720 reference "sec:Nesting"
5724 for a full explanation of nesting.
5728 \begin_layout Standard
5729 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5738 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5741 \begin_layout Standard
5742 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5743 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5746 \begin_layout Itemize
5747 The label for the first level
5751 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5755 \begin_layout Itemize
5756 The label for the second level is a dash.
5760 \begin_layout Itemize
5761 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5765 \begin_layout Itemize
5766 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5770 \begin_layout Itemize
5771 Back out to the third level.
5775 \begin_layout Itemize
5776 Back to the second level.
5780 \begin_layout Itemize
5781 Back to the outermost level.
5784 \begin_layout Standard
5785 These are the default labels for an
5790 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5795 dialog in the submenu
5800 \begin_inset Index idx
5803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5809 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5813 \begin_layout Standard
5814 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5815 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5817 \begin_inset space ~
5821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5823 reference "sec:Nesting"
5830 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5832 \begin_inset Index idx
5835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5844 name "sec:Enumerate"
5851 \begin_layout Standard
5856 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5857 It has these properties:
5860 \begin_layout Enumerate
5861 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5865 \begin_layout Enumerate
5866 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5870 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5880 environment resets the counter to one.
5883 \begin_layout Enumerate
5896 \begin_layout Enumerate
5897 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5898 Items can have any length.
5901 \begin_layout Enumerate
5902 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5909 \begin_layout Enumerate
5910 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5914 \begin_layout Standard
5923 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
5925 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
5926 labels the four different levels in an
5933 \begin_layout Enumerate
5934 The first level of an
5938 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5947 \begin_layout Enumerate
5948 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5952 \begin_layout Enumerate
5953 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5956 \begin_layout Enumerate
5957 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5962 \begin_layout Enumerate
5963 Back to the third level
5967 \begin_layout Enumerate
5968 Back to the second level.
5972 \begin_layout Enumerate
5973 Back to the outermost level.
5976 \begin_layout Standard
5977 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5981 environment, see section
5982 \begin_inset space ~
5986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5988 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
5993 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
5997 \begin_layout Standard
5998 There is more to nesting
6002 environments than we've stated here.
6003 You should read section
6004 \begin_inset space ~
6008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6010 reference "sec:Nesting"
6014 to learn more about nesting.
6017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6019 \begin_inset Index idx
6022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6031 \begin_layout Standard
6032 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6036 list has no fixed label.
6037 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6046 of the first line as the label.
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Example: This is an example of the
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6060 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6064 \begin_layout Standard
6066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6073 it is meant that the first usage of the
6077 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6079 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6087 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6093 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6095 \begin_inset space ~
6101 \begin_inset space ~
6105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6107 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6111 for more information.) Here is an example:
6114 \begin_layout Description
6116 \begin_inset space ~
6119 Example: This one shows how to use a
6122 \begin_inset space ~
6134 \begin_layout Description
6135 Usage: You should use the
6139 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6140 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6142 It's not a good idea to use a
6146 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6147 You're better off using
6159 paragraphs into them.
6162 \begin_layout Description
6163 Nesting: You can nest
6167 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6171 \begin_layout Standard
6172 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6173 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6174 them from the first line.
6177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6179 \begin_inset Index idx
6182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6191 \begin_layout Standard
6196 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6197 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6201 \begin_layout Standard
6210 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6212 Here are its properties:
6215 \begin_layout Labeling
6216 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6218 \begin_inset space ~
6221 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6230 of each line as the item label.
6235 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6236 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6237 space as described above.
6240 \begin_layout Labeling
6241 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6242 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6243 uses different margins for the item label and the
6244 body of the item text.
6245 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6246 label width plus a little extra space.
6250 \begin_layout Labeling
6251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6253 \begin_inset space ~
6256 width \SpecialChar LyX
6257 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6258 If the label width is larger, the label
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6266 into the first line.
6267 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6268 margin of the rest of the item text.
6271 \begin_layout Labeling
6272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6274 \begin_inset space ~
6277 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6282 environment has the same left margin.
6283 \begin_inset Newline newline
6286 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6289 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6296 dialog (toolbar button
6299 arg "layout-paragraph"
6306 \begin_inset space ~
6311 determines the default label width.
6312 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 multiple times instead.
6322 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6332 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6335 \begin_inset space ~
6340 every time you alter a label in a
6345 \begin_inset Newline newline
6348 The predefined default width is the length of
6349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6357 \begin_inset space ~
6363 \begin_layout Standard
6368 list the same way as the
6372 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6378 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6382 \begin_layout Standard
6387 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6388 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6390 \begin_inset space ~
6394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6396 reference "sec:Nesting"
6400 to learn about nesting.
6403 \begin_layout Standard
6404 There is yet another feature of the
6408 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6409 left-justifies the item labels by
6411 You can use additional
6415 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6416 justifies the item label.
6421 are documented in section
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6428 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6433 Here are some examples:
6436 \begin_layout Labeling
6437 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6438 Left The default for
6445 \begin_layout Labeling
6446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6454 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6457 \begin_layout Labeling
6458 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6470 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6473 \begin_layout Subsection
6475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6477 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6482 \begin_inset Index idx
6485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6494 \begin_layout Standard
6495 The features described in this section require that the module
6497 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6499 is loaded in the document settings.
6500 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6506 \begin_inset Index idx
6509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6511 -packages ! enumitem
6519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6520 Custom Enumerate Lists
6521 \begin_inset Index idx
6524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6525 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6535 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6541 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6542 There you add the command
6545 \begin_layout Standard
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6566 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6567 Code, look at section
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6574 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6587 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6594 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6595 For capital Roman numerals replace
6607 in the command above.
6608 For Arabic numerals use
6616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6623 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 You can only number 26
6649 \begin_inset space ~
6652 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6660 \begin_layout Standard
6661 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6662 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6666 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6669 \begin_layout Enumerate
6670 \begin_inset Argument 1
6673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6699 \begin_layout Enumerate
6700 \begin_inset Argument 1
6703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 \begin_layout Enumerate
6731 \begin_layout Enumerate
6732 \begin_inset Argument 1
6735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 \begin_layout Enumerate
6760 \begin_inset Argument 1
6763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6790 For this list these commands were used:
6793 \begin_layout Standard
6804 \begin_inset Newline newline
6812 \begin_inset Newline newline
6820 \begin_inset Newline newline
6830 \begin_layout Standard
6837 makes the label emphasized and
6846 \begin_layout Standard
6847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6855 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6856 lists until you change the definition.
6864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6866 \begin_inset Index idx
6869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6878 \begin_layout Standard
6879 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6882 \begin_layout Enumerate
6883 \begin_inset Argument 1
6886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6905 \begin_inset Note Note
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6909 goes back to default numbering
6917 \begin_layout Enumerate
6921 \begin_layout Standard
6925 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6929 \begin_layout Standard
6930 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6935 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
6936 to indicate that it is a resumed
6937 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
6938 , but in the output.
6941 \begin_layout Standard
6942 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6950 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
6959 \begin_layout Standard
6960 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6962 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6963 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6964 of a normal enumeration.
6965 There, insert the command
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6974 \begin_layout Standard
6979 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6983 \begin_layout Enumerate
6987 \begin_layout Enumerate
6991 \begin_layout Standard
6992 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6995 \begin_layout Enumerate
6996 \begin_inset Argument 1
6999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7015 This enumeration starts at 4
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7035 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7038 \begin_layout Itemize
7042 \begin_layout Itemize
7043 with standard spacing
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7049 Add there the command
7053 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7056 \begin_layout Itemize
7057 \begin_inset Argument 1
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Itemize
7083 \begin_layout Itemize
7087 \begin_layout Standard
7088 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7095 \begin_inset Index idx
7098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7100 -packages ! enumitem
7106 For more information see its documentation,
7107 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7119 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7120 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7124 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7127 \begin_layout Enumerate
7128 \begin_inset Argument 1
7131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7139 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7153 with negative indentation
7156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7157 Further Customization
7158 \begin_inset Index idx
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7162 Lists ! Customization
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7171 You can also change the style of description lists.
7175 \begin_layout Standard
7181 \begin_layout Standard
7182 changes the description label font, the command
7185 \begin_layout Standard
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 sets the list style.
7195 \begin_layout Standard
7196 An example where the command
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7204 itshape, style=nextline
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7211 \begin_layout Description
7213 \begin_inset space ~
7217 \begin_inset Argument 1
7220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7226 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7228 itshape, style=nextline
7238 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7239 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7243 \begin_layout Description
7245 \begin_inset space ~
7248 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7249 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7250 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7253 \begin_layout Standard
7254 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7260 \begin_inset Index idx
7263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 -packages ! enumitem
7271 For more information see its documentation
7272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7281 \begin_layout Subsection
7283 \begin_inset Index idx
7286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7297 \begin_inset space ~
7300 Address: An Overview
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7304 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7305 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7313 \begin_inset space ~
7319 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7320 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7321 gags on the document.
7322 In contrast, you can use the
7329 \begin_inset space ~
7334 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7335 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 Of course, you're not limited to using
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7356 \begin_inset space ~
7361 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7362 some European academic papers.
7365 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7369 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7382 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7386 \begin_inset space ~
7391 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7392 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7393 Here's an example of each:
7396 \begin_layout Right Address
7398 \begin_inset Newline newline
7402 \begin_inset Newline newline
7406 \begin_inset Newline newline
7409 When is it? What is today?
7412 \begin_layout Standard
7416 \begin_inset space ~
7422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7424 the largest block of text on a single line.
7425 Here's an example of the
7432 \begin_layout Address
7434 \begin_inset Newline newline
7437 Where do I send this
7438 \begin_inset Newline newline
7441 Your post office and country
7444 \begin_layout Standard
7445 As you can see, both
7452 \begin_inset space ~
7457 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7462 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7463 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7469 This makes sense, since
7477 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7478 Thus, you have to use
7485 arg "newline-insert newline"
7490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7493 \begin_inset space ~
7497 \begin_inset space ~
7502 ) to start a new line in an
7509 \begin_inset space ~
7517 \begin_layout Subsection
7521 \begin_layout Standard
7522 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7523 or list of references.
7525 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7530 \begin_inset Index idx
7533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7542 \begin_layout Standard
7547 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7548 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7549 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7550 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7564 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7565 The book document classes ignores the
7569 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7573 in a letter document class.
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7581 environment does several things for you.
7582 First, it puts the centered label
7583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7591 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7593 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7594 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7595 the subsequent text.
7596 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7598 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7602 \begin_layout Standard
7603 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7607 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7608 The new paragraph will still be in the
7613 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7614 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 \begin_inset Float figure
7623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7625 \begin_inset Graphics
7626 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7634 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7639 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7660 \begin_layout Standard
7661 We would love to demonstrate the
7665 environment, but since this document is in the
7666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7673 class, we can't do this.
7674 We inserted it therefore as figure
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7681 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7686 If you have never heard of an
7687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7694 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7711 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7718 \begin_layout Standard
7723 environment is used to list references.
7724 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7725 only use it at the end of the document.
7737 \begin_layout Standard
7738 When you first open a
7742 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7743 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7759 depending on the document class.
7760 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7761 Each paragraph of the
7765 environment is a bibliography entry.
7770 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7771 Each new paragraph is still in the
7778 \begin_layout Standard
7779 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7780 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7782 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7784 handling, have a look at section
7785 \begin_inset space ~
7789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7791 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7798 \begin_layout Subsection
7799 Special Environments
7802 \begin_layout Standard
7804 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7805 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7808 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7813 \begin_inset Index idx
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7826 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7839 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7841 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7846 key as a fixed whitespace.
7850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset space ~
7868 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7886 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7889 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7892 arg "newline-insert newline"
7909 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7910 So, when you finish using the
7915 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7916 Also, you can nest the
7921 environment inside of others.
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7928 \begin_layout Itemize
7932 arg "newline-insert newline"
7935 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7940 \begin_inset space \space{}
7950 arg "newline-insert newline"
7956 \begin_layout Itemize
7960 arg "newline-insert newline"
7970 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7976 \begin_layout Itemize
7977 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7978 You must put at least one
7982 in any line you want blank.
7983 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
7987 \begin_layout Itemize
7988 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7992 since that will insert
7997 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8000 arg "self-insert \""
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8010 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8014 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8018 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8022 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8026 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8027 printf("Hello World!
8032 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8036 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8040 \begin_layout Standard
8041 This is just the standard
8042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8053 \begin_layout Standard
8059 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8061 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8062 as if you used a typewriter.
8063 \begin_inset Index idx
8066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8067 Paragraph environments|)
8072 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8075 Program Code Listings
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8092 \begin_inset Index idx
8095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8109 environment is similar to the
8114 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8115 computer console text.
8120 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8134 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8135 you can have empty lines.
8148 \begin_layout Itemize
8149 have a certain language and a text style
8152 \begin_layout Itemize
8153 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8154 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8155 and \SpecialChar TeX
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8160 Because of these properties
8164 works like a typewriter.
8168 \begin_layout Verbatim
8172 \begin_layout Verbatim
8175 The following 2 lines are empty:
8178 \begin_layout Verbatim
8182 \begin_layout Verbatim
8186 \begin_layout Verbatim
8187 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8197 environment is identical to
8201 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8202 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8209 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8213 \begin_layout Section
8214 Nesting Environments
8215 \begin_inset Index idx
8218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 Nesting ! Environments
8225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8234 \begin_layout Subsection
8238 \begin_layout Standard
8240 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8242 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8244 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8246 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8258 \begin_layout Enumerate
8262 \begin_layout Enumerate
8267 \begin_layout Enumerate
8271 \begin_layout Enumerate
8276 \begin_layout Enumerate
8280 \begin_layout Standard
8281 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8282 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8284 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8286 \begin_inset space ~
8290 \begin_inset space ~
8298 \begin_inset space ~
8302 \begin_inset space ~
8307 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8309 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8312 arg "depth-increment"
8318 arg "depth-decrement"
8332 arg "depth-increment"
8338 arg "depth-decrement"
8342 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8343 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8347 \begin_layout Standard
8348 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8349 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8350 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8351 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8352 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8358 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8360 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8363 \begin_layout Subsection
8364 What You Can and Can't Nest
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8368 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8369 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8373 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8374 than a simple yes or no.
8375 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8378 \begin_layout Itemize
8379 Completely unnestable
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8383 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8387 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8392 \begin_layout Standard
8393 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8394 environments have them:
8397 \begin_layout Description
8398 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8399 Can't nest into them.
8403 \begin_layout Itemize
8409 \begin_layout Itemize
8415 \begin_layout Itemize
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8427 \begin_layout Itemize
8434 \begin_layout Description
8436 \begin_inset space ~
8439 Nestable You can nest them.
8440 You can nest other things into them.
8444 \begin_layout Itemize
8450 \begin_layout Itemize
8456 \begin_layout Itemize
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8468 \begin_layout Itemize
8474 \begin_layout Itemize
8480 \begin_layout Itemize
8486 \begin_layout Itemize
8493 \begin_layout Itemize
8499 \begin_layout Itemize
8506 \begin_layout Description
8507 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8508 You can't nest anything into them.
8512 \begin_layout Itemize
8518 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8530 \begin_layout Itemize
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Standard
8608 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8616 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8626 \begin_inset space ~
8629 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8630 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8631 nested section headings violate this.
8639 \begin_layout Subsection
8640 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8641 \begin_inset Index idx
8644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8645 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8653 \begin_layout Standard
8654 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8655 affected by nesting anyhow.
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8671 \begin_layout Standard
8673 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8681 Figures and tables in
8685 are not affected by this.
8690 Have a look at section
8691 \begin_inset space ~
8695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8697 reference "sec:Floats"
8701 for more information about
8708 \begin_layout Standard
8710 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8711 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8715 \begin_layout Standard
8716 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8724 of its own, it behaves just like a
8725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8732 paragraph environment.
8733 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8737 \begin_layout Standard
8738 Here's an example with a table:
8741 \begin_layout Enumerate
8746 \begin_layout Enumerate
8747 This is (a) and it's nested.
8751 \begin_layout Standard
8752 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8758 \begin_layout Standard
8760 \begin_inset Tabular
8761 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8762 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8763 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8764 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8856 \begin_layout Enumerate
8858 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8862 \begin_layout Enumerate
8866 \begin_layout Standard
8867 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8870 \begin_layout Enumerate
8875 \begin_layout Enumerate
8876 This is (a) and it's nested.
8880 \begin_layout Standard
8881 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8887 \begin_layout Standard
8889 \begin_inset Tabular
8890 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8891 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8892 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8893 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8977 \begin_layout Standard
8978 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8984 \begin_layout Enumerate
8991 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8994 \begin_layout Enumerate
8998 \begin_layout Standard
8999 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9003 \begin_layout Standard
9004 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9007 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9016 This is (a) and it's nested.
9019 \begin_layout Standard
9020 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Standard
9028 \begin_inset Tabular
9029 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9030 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9031 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9032 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9117 \begin_layout Standard
9118 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9124 \begin_layout Enumerate
9126 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9133 \begin_layout Enumerate
9137 \begin_layout Standard
9138 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9144 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9145 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9149 \begin_layout Subsection
9150 Usage and General Features
9153 \begin_layout Standard
9154 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9155 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9164 is the innermost possible depth.
9165 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 level #1 – outermost
9173 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Itemize
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9202 \begin_layout Standard
9203 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9204 both of them in the example.
9205 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9215 For example, if we tried to nest another
9220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9227 , we would get errors.
9230 \begin_layout Subsection
9232 \begin_inset Index idx
9235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 \begin_layout Standard
9245 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9246 We have several examples of nested environments.
9247 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9251 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9252 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9255 \begin_layout Labeling
9256 \labelwidthstring MMM
9257 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9266 \begin_layout Labeling
9267 \labelwidthstring MMM
9268 #2-a This is level #2.
9269 We created it by using
9272 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9278 arg "depth-increment"
9285 \begin_layout Labeling
9286 \labelwidthstring MMM
9287 #3-a This is level #3.
9288 This time, we just enter
9295 arg "depth-increment"
9299 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9303 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9309 arg "depth-increment"
9316 \begin_layout Standard
9321 environment, nested inside of
9322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9330 So, it's at level #4.
9331 We did this by entering
9334 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9340 arg "depth-increment"
9343 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9348 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9364 \begin_layout Standard
9369 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9372 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9378 \begin_layout Labeling
9379 \labelwidthstring MMM
9380 #4-a This is level #4.
9384 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9387 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9392 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9396 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9401 keep nesting things inside
9402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9413 \begin_layout Labeling
9414 \labelwidthstring MMM
9415 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9420 \begin_layout Labeling
9421 \labelwidthstring MMM
9422 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9423 and this is level #6.
9424 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9428 \begin_layout Labeling
9429 \labelwidthstring MMM
9430 #5-b Back to level #5.
9434 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9440 arg "depth-decrement"
9447 \begin_layout Labeling
9448 \labelwidthstring MMM
9452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9458 arg "depth-decrement"
9461 , we're back at level #4.
9465 \begin_layout Labeling
9466 \labelwidthstring MMM
9467 #3-b Back to level #3.
9468 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9472 \begin_layout Labeling
9473 \labelwidthstring MMM
9474 #2-b Back to level #2.
9479 \begin_layout Labeling
9480 \labelwidthstring MMM
9481 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9482 After this sentence, we will enter
9486 and change the paragraph environment back to
9493 \begin_layout Standard
9494 We could have also used the
9510 environment in place of the
9515 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9518 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9519 Example 2: Inheritance
9522 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9523 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9526 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9535 arg "depth-increment"
9539 \begin_inset Newline newline
9542 which, we will change to the
9550 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 environment, at level #2.
9558 \begin_layout Enumerate
9559 Notice how the nested
9563 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9567 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9571 \begin_layout Standard
9572 We ended this example by entering
9577 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9581 and reset the nesting depth by using
9584 arg "depth-decrement"
9590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9591 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9600 \begin_inset Argument 1
9603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9604 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9612 \begin_layout Enumerate
9613 This is level #1, in an
9617 paragraph environment.
9618 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9622 \begin_layout Enumerate
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-increment"
9637 Now, what happens if we nest an
9641 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9642 label be? An asterisk?
9646 \begin_layout Itemize
9656 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9657 So, its label is a bullet.
9658 (We got here by using
9661 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9667 arg "depth-increment"
9670 , then changing the environment to
9678 \begin_layout Itemize
9679 Here's level #4, produced using
9682 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9688 arg "depth-increment"
9692 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9697 \begin_layout Enumerate
9700 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9705 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9709 , because we are in the
9717 environment (that is, it is an
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9737 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9738 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9742 \begin_layout Enumerate
9743 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9746 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9749 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9756 arg "depth-decrement"
9759 to decrease the depth after the next
9762 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9769 \begin_layout Enumerate
9771 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9776 \begin_layout Enumerate
9778 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9779 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9783 \begin_layout Enumerate
9784 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9793 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9798 reset the counter for the label.
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9806 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 arg "depth-decrement"
9815 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9816 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9817 into the twofold-nested
9825 \begin_layout Enumerate
9826 The same thing happens if we do another
9829 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9835 arg "depth-decrement"
9838 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9841 \begin_layout Standard
9842 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9847 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9862 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
9869 The same rule applies for the
9873 environment, as well.
9876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9877 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9880 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9882 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9883 the same detail with how we did it.
9892 \begin_layout Standard
9900 arg "depth-increment"
9907 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9908 the example in parentheses someplace.
9909 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9910 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9911 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9915 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9925 Now we will add verse.
9926 \begin_inset Newline newline
9929 It will get much worse.
9930 \begin_inset Newline newline
9940 arg "depth-increment"
9951 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9952 \begin_inset Newline newline
9955 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9956 \begin_inset Newline newline
9962 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9975 \begin_layout Standard
9976 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9982 \begin_layout Standard
9984 \begin_inset Tabular
9985 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9986 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9987 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9988 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10073 \begin_layout Verse
10077 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10087 arg "depth-increment"
10093 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10107 arg "depth-decrement"
10114 \begin_layout Enumerate
10119 : level #1) This is another item.
10120 Note that selecting a
10124 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10125 3 times to put the table inside the
10133 \begin_layout Quotation
10134 We're now ending the
10138 list and changing to
10143 We're still at level #1.
10144 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10145 The next set of paragraphs is a
10146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10153 We will nest both the
10160 \begin_inset space ~
10165 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10169 for the letter body.
10173 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10176 to preserve the depth.
10177 Remember that you need to use
10180 arg "newline-insert newline"
10183 to create multiple lines inside the
10190 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_layout Right Address
10202 \begin_inset Newline newline
10205 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10206 \begin_inset Newline newline
10212 \begin_layout Address
10214 \begin_inset space ~
10220 \begin_layout Quotation
10221 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10225 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10226 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10227 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10228 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10229 as soon as possible.
10230 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10233 \begin_layout Quotation
10234 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10235 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10236 with your order, along with payment.
10239 \begin_layout Quotation
10240 We thank you again for your patience.
10243 \begin_layout Address
10245 \begin_inset Newline newline
10252 \begin_layout Quotation
10253 That ends that example!
10256 \begin_layout Standard
10257 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10258 gives you a lot of power with just
10260 We could have easily nested an
10281 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10284 \begin_layout Subsection
10286 \begin_inset Index idx
10289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10290 Nesting ! Separation
10296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10298 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10305 \begin_layout Standard
10306 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10308 For example you need two different enumerations:
10311 \begin_layout Enumerate
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10321 \begin_layout Enumerate
10325 \begin_layout Standard
10326 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10332 \begin_layout Itemize
10338 \begin_layout Standard
10339 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10345 \begin_layout Enumerate
10349 \begin_layout Enumerate
10353 \begin_layout Enumerate
10357 \begin_layout Standard
10358 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10359 list item and use the menu
10361 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10362 Start New Environment
10365 This inserts a plain separator (red line in LyX) and behind it the new
10367 Alternatively set the cursor at the end of a list item and press
10370 arg "paragraph-break"
10374 This inserts a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
10375 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10376 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10377 One can change the separator type by right-clicking on it.
10380 \begin_layout Standard
10381 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10384 arg "paragraph-break"
10387 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10390 \begin_layout Section
10391 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10392 \begin_inset Index idx
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10406 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10408 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10409 be broken at the end of a line.
10410 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10414 \begin_layout Subsection
10416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10418 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10423 \begin_inset Index idx
10426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10435 \begin_layout Standard
10436 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10437 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10438 ) not to break the line at
10440 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10443 \begin_layout Quote
10444 Further documentation is given in section
10445 \begin_inset Newline newline
10449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10451 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10459 \begin_layout Standard
10460 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10475 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10484 A protected space is set with
10486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10487 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10489 \begin_inset space ~
10497 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10503 \begin_layout Subsection
10505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10507 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10512 \begin_inset Index idx
10515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10516 Spacing ! Horizontal
10524 \begin_layout Standard
10525 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10528 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 The length units are listed in Appendix
10533 \begin_inset space ~
10537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10539 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10550 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10555 \begin_inset Index idx
10558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10559 Spaces ! Inter-word
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10569 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10570 at the ends of sentences.
10571 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10572 automatically takes care about this.
10573 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10574 followed by a period; see section
10575 \begin_inset space ~
10579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10581 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10586 To insert a normal space, select
10588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10589 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10591 \begin_inset space ~
10599 arg "space-insert normal"
10605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10609 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10614 \begin_inset Index idx
10617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10626 \begin_layout Standard
10628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10635 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10644 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10645 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10646 inside abbreviations:
10649 \begin_layout Quote
10651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10655 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10659 or between values and units.
10660 Compare for example this:
10661 \begin_inset Newline newline
10665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10669 \begin_inset Newline newline
10672 10 kg (normal space
10675 \begin_layout Standard
10676 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10679 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10681 \begin_inset space ~
10689 arg "space-insert thin"
10695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10700 You can also insert the following space types:
10703 \begin_layout Description
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10712 space A line with a
10713 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10717 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10721 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10724 negative thin space between the arrows.
10727 \begin_layout Description
10729 \begin_inset space ~
10733 \begin_inset space ~
10736 space A line with a
10737 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10741 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10745 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10748 negative medium space between the arrows.
10751 \begin_layout Description
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10760 space A line with a
10761 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10765 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10769 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10772 negative thick space between the arrows.
10775 \begin_layout Description
10777 \begin_inset space ~
10781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10785 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10789 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10793 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10797 \begin_inset space ~
10801 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10804 em) space between the arrows.
10807 \begin_layout Description
10809 \begin_inset space ~
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10817 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10821 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10825 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10829 \begin_inset space ~
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10836 em) space between the arrows.
10839 \begin_layout Description
10841 \begin_inset space ~
10845 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10853 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10857 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10861 \begin_inset space ~
10865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10868 em) space between the arrows.
10871 \begin_layout Description
10873 \begin_inset space ~
10877 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10881 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10886 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10893 cm space between the arrows.
10896 \begin_layout Standard
10898 \begin_inset space ~
10902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10904 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10908 lists the different space sizes.
10911 \begin_layout Standard
10912 \begin_inset Float table
10917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10918 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10923 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10927 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10937 \begin_inset Tabular
10938 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10939 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11057 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11216 \begin_inset Index idx
11219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11228 \begin_layout Standard
11229 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11230 feature for adding extra space
11231 in a uniform fashion.
11232 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11233 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11234 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11235 equally between themselves.
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11239 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11242 \begin_layout Quote
11244 This is on the left side
11245 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11248 This is on the right
11251 \begin_layout Quote
11254 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11258 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11264 \begin_layout Quote
11267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11271 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11275 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11281 \begin_layout Standard
11282 That was an example in the
11288 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11296 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11299 is one in a standard paragraph.
11300 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11304 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11307 \begin_layout Standard
11308 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11311 \begin_inset space ~
11316 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11321 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11333 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11337 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_layout Standard
11345 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11349 \begin_inset space ~
11355 \begin_layout Standard
11357 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11367 \begin_layout Standard
11369 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11373 \begin_inset space ~
11379 \begin_layout Standard
11381 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11385 \begin_inset space ~
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11400 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11404 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11406 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11407 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11411 option in the space dialog.
11419 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11423 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11428 \begin_inset Index idx
11431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11440 \begin_layout Standard
11441 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11442 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11445 \begin_layout Standard
11446 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11449 What is correct English?:
11450 \begin_inset Newline newline
11454 \begin_inset Newline newline
11458 \begin_inset space ~
11461 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11462 \begin_inset Newline newline
11466 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11477 \begin_inset Newline newline
11481 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11492 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11500 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11505 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11517 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11520 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11524 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11541 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11550 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11551 That is why it is named
11552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11560 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11561 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11565 \begin_layout Subsection
11567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11569 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11574 \begin_inset Index idx
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11586 \begin_layout Standard
11587 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11590 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11592 \begin_inset space ~
11598 There you find the following sizes:
11601 \begin_layout Standard
11614 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11615 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11620 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11622 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11623 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11625 \begin_inset space ~
11631 \begin_inset Index idx
11634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11635 Document ! Settings
11640 for the paragraph separation.
11641 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11652 \begin_layout Standard
11658 \begin_inset Index idx
11661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11667 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11668 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11673 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11674 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11683 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11692 s are described in section
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11699 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11708 If there are several
11712 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11713 You can therefore use
11717 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11720 \begin_layout Standard
11725 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11726 \begin_inset space ~
11730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11732 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11739 \begin_layout Standard
11740 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11750 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11751 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11763 \begin_layout Subsection
11764 Paragraph Alignment
11765 \begin_inset Index idx
11768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 Paragraph ! Alignment
11777 \begin_layout Standard
11778 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11780 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11783 dialog (toolbar button
11786 arg "layout-paragraph"
11790 There are five possibilities:
11793 \begin_layout Itemize
11801 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11807 \begin_layout Itemize
11815 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11821 \begin_layout Itemize
11829 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11835 \begin_layout Itemize
11843 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11849 \begin_layout Itemize
11857 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11863 \begin_layout Standard
11864 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11865 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11866 the left and right margins.
11867 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11870 \begin_layout Standard
11872 This paragraph is right aligned,
11875 \begin_layout Standard
11877 this one is centered,
11880 \begin_layout Standard
11882 this one is left aligned.
11885 \begin_layout Subsection
11887 \begin_inset Index idx
11890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11891 Page breaks ! Forced
11897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11899 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11906 \begin_layout Standard
11907 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
11908 does the page breaks in your document, you can
11909 force a page break where you want one.
11910 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
11911 is good at page breaking.
11912 Only if you use a lot of
11916 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
11917 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11920 \begin_layout Standard
11921 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11922 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11926 have to change the page breaking.
11929 \begin_layout Standard
11930 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11932 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11934 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11935 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11937 \begin_inset space ~
11943 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11946 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11948 \begin_inset space ~
11953 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11955 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11956 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11961 at the top of a page.
11962 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11964 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11965 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11966 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11970 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11974 to learn more about
11981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11985 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11990 \begin_inset Index idx
11993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11994 Page breaks ! Clear
12002 \begin_layout Standard
12003 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12004 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12005 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12006 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12007 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12010 \begin_layout Standard
12011 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12013 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12014 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12016 \begin_inset space ~
12022 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12025 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12027 \begin_inset space ~
12031 \begin_inset space ~
12036 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12037 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12040 \begin_layout Subsection
12042 \begin_inset Index idx
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12054 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12062 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12064 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12067 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12069 \begin_inset space ~
12073 \begin_inset space ~
12081 arg "newline-insert newline"
12085 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12088 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12090 \begin_inset space ~
12094 \begin_inset space ~
12102 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12105 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12107 This is useful to avoid
12108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12115 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12118 \begin_layout Standard
12119 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12120 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12122 very good at line breaking.
12123 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12124 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12125 \begin_inset space ~
12129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12131 reference "sec:Quote"
12136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12138 reference "sec:Verse"
12143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12145 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12152 \begin_layout Subsection
12154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12156 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12161 \begin_inset Index idx
12164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12173 \begin_layout Standard
12175 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12186 \begin_layout Standard
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12198 you can insert horizontal lines.
12199 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12200 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12201 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12204 \begin_layout Standard
12206 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12217 \begin_layout Section
12218 Characters and Symbols
12221 \begin_layout Standard
12222 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12223 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12224 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12232 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12236 for information on how this is done.
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12245 dialog via the menu
12247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 \begin_layout Standard
12255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12263 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12264 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12266 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12274 \begin_layout Section
12275 Fonts and Text Styles
12276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12278 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12285 \begin_layout Subsection
12287 \begin_inset Index idx
12290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12299 \begin_layout Standard
12300 There are two types of fonts:
12303 \begin_layout Description
12305 \begin_inset space ~
12309 \begin_inset Index idx
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12318 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12323 characters) in the font.
12324 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12325 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12326 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12327 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12328 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12329 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12330 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12331 \begin_inset Newline newline
12334 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12335 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12336 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12337 sizes than at small ones.
12338 \begin_inset Newline newline
12352 \begin_inset space ~
12360 \begin_layout Description
12362 \begin_inset space ~
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12375 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12376 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12377 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12378 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12379 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12380 image manipulation program.
12381 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12382 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12383 \begin_inset space ~
12386 pixels high up to 34
12387 \begin_inset space ~
12390 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12391 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12392 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12394 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12395 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12396 \begin_inset Newline newline
12399 Bitmap fonts are named
12402 \begin_inset space ~
12407 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12412 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12413 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12414 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12415 use scalable fonts.
12418 \begin_layout Standard
12419 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12424 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12425 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12426 font to emphasize text, you use an
12427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12435 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12437 In \SpecialChar LyX
12438 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12442 \begin_layout Subsection
12445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12447 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12454 \begin_layout Standard
12455 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12456 used its own fonts.
12457 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12458 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12461 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12462 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12463 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12464 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12465 to a word processor.
12466 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12467 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12468 files are very portable across
12469 different machines.
12470 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12471 has increased a lot
12472 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12475 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12483 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12488 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12489 code in the document
12490 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12494 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12495 engines that are also able directly
12496 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12498 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12500 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12502 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12503 that is installed on your system.
12504 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12507 \begin_layout Standard
12508 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12516 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12517 es; so you might have to experiment.
12525 \begin_layout Standard
12526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12535 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12536 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12537 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12538 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12547 \begin_layout Subsection
12548 Document Font and Font size
12549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12551 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12556 \begin_inset Index idx
12559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12566 \begin_inset Index idx
12569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12579 You can set the document fonts in the
12581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12585 \begin_inset Index idx
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12589 Document ! Settings
12599 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12600 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12603 \begin_inset space ~
12612 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12614 \begin_inset space ~
12617 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12620 \begin_layout Standard
12625 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12626 This requires that you use
12638 as the output format, i.
12639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12643 \begin_inset space \space{}
12646 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12647 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12648 installed (see section
12649 \begin_inset space ~
12653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12655 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12660 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12662 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12663 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12665 \begin_inset space ~
12668 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12669 cannot determine the family.
12670 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12671 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12674 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12678 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12679 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12684 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12690 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12691 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12699 \begin_inset space ~
12705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12718 European Computer Modern
12721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12728 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12731 \begin_layout Standard
12740 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12741 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12746 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12749 \begin_inset space ~
12754 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12760 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12761 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12764 \begin_layout Itemize
12768 \begin_inset space ~
12773 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12786 \begin_inset space ~
12791 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12792 community in order to replace
12796 as the default font.
12797 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12798 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12801 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12815 One difference is improved kerning.
12823 \begin_layout Itemize
12827 \begin_inset space ~
12831 \begin_inset space ~
12836 fonts in (the rare) case that
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12844 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12859 Virtual means that it
12860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12871 -glyphs from other fonts.
12872 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12894 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12900 \begin_inset Index idx
12903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12905 -packages ! aeguill
12910 with the document preamble line
12911 \begin_inset Newline newline
12918 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12919 \begin_inset Newline newline
12924 will fix the guillemet problem.
12929 and that accented characters are not
12933 glyph, but built of
12937 characters, the accent and the letter.
12938 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12944 If you search for example for the French word
12945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12952 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12961 and not for the glyph
12962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12976 \begin_layout Itemize
12977 If you do not like the look of
12985 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12996 \begin_inset space ~
13006 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13010 serif and typewriter fonts,
13014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13015 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13022 \begin_inset space ~
13031 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13036 \begin_inset space \space{}
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13048 \begin_inset space \space{}
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13072 but you can also select your own.
13073 \begin_inset Newline newline
13076 The differences between roman,
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13088 fonts are explained in section
13089 \begin_inset space ~
13093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13095 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13100 \begin_inset Newline newline
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13111 was originally designed for newspapers.
13112 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13113 into the small newspaper columns.
13117 \begin_inset space ~
13122 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13125 \begin_layout Standard
13126 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13139 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13144 depends on the class you are using.
13145 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13148 \begin_layout Standard
13149 Note that the font size is the
13154 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13155 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13156 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13157 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13160 \begin_inset space ~
13166 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13167 \begin_inset space ~
13171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13173 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13180 \begin_layout Standard
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13189 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13191 \begin_inset space ~
13194 serif or typewriter.
13199 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13209 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13212 \begin_layout Standard
13217 LaTeX font encoding
13219 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13220 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13226 \begin_inset Index idx
13229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13231 -packages ! fontenc
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13243 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13248 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13249 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13256 \begin_layout Standard
13257 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13259 Use Old Style Figures
13263 Use True Small Caps
13266 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13269 Use Old Style Figures
13271 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13273 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13281 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13285 Use True Small Caps
13287 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13288 of scaled capitals.
13289 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13290 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13293 \begin_layout Standard
13298 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13299 a font to display the script characters.
13303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13304 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13310 \begin_inset Index idx
13313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13320 So this has no effect for the document language
13334 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13338 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13346 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13351 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13352 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13354 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13356 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13359 dialog, see section
13360 \begin_inset space ~
13364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13366 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13378 \begin_layout Subsection
13382 \begin_layout Standard
13383 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13384 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13386 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13387 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13388 choose a math font in the dialog
13390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13394 \begin_inset Index idx
13397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13398 Document ! Settings
13404 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13405 automatically selects a math font.
13406 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13407 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13416 \begin_inset space ~
13422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13427 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13428 document font is available.
13431 \begin_layout Standard
13432 Note that the math font will not be used for
13436 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13442 or by the insertion of the command
13449 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13450 \begin_inset space ~
13454 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13455 while the math characters do not.
13457 \begin_inset space ~
13460 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13463 \begin_inset space ~
13471 \begin_inset space ~
13476 in the document font settings.
13479 \begin_layout Standard
13480 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13481 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13482 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13483 font (in most cases
13484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13499 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13500 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13520 \begin_layout Subsection
13521 Using Different Character Styles
13522 \begin_inset Index idx
13525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13532 \begin_inset Index idx
13535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13544 \begin_layout Standard
13545 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13546 automatically changes the character style for certain
13547 paragraph environments.
13549 supports two character styles,
13558 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13567 style, do one of the following:
13570 \begin_layout Itemize
13571 click on the toolbar button
13580 \begin_layout Itemize
13581 use the key binding
13590 \begin_layout Standard
13591 These commands are all toggles.
13596 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13599 \begin_layout Standard
13600 One typically uses the
13604 style for proper names.
13606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13613 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13621 \begin_layout Standard
13622 A more widely used character style is the
13627 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13634 \begin_layout Itemize
13635 clicking on the toolbar button
13644 \begin_layout Itemize
13645 using the keybindings
13654 \begin_layout Standard
13659 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13661 use a different font.
13664 \begin_layout Standard
13665 We've been using the
13669 style all over the place in this document.
13670 Here's one more example:
13673 \begin_layout Quotation
13676 Do not overuse character styles!
13679 \begin_layout Standard
13680 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13681 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13682 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13683 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13687 \begin_layout Standard
13688 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13696 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13698 \begin_inset space ~
13701 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13707 arg "dialog-show character"
13713 \begin_layout Subsection
13714 Fine-Tuning with the
13719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13721 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13726 \begin_inset Index idx
13729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13738 \begin_layout Standard
13739 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13741 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13742 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13743 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13744 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13745 from ordinary dialog.
13748 \begin_layout Standard
13749 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13750 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13751 \begin_inset Newline newline
13754 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13755 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13758 \begin_layout Standard
13759 To use custom character styles, open the
13761 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13763 \begin_inset space ~
13766 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13769 dialog or press the toolbar button
13772 arg "dialog-show character"
13776 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13777 font property that you can choose.
13778 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13786 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13791 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13792 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13793 environments all at once.
13796 \begin_layout Standard
13797 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13800 \begin_inset space ~
13812 \begin_layout Labeling
13813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13827 The possible options are:
13831 \begin_layout Labeling
13832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13837 This is the Roman font family.
13838 Normally a serif font.
13839 It's also the default family.
13849 \begin_layout Labeling
13850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13854 \begin_inset space ~
13861 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13873 \begin_layout Labeling
13874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13881 This is the Typewriter font family.
13887 arg "font-typewriter"
13896 \begin_layout Labeling
13897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13902 This corresponds to the print weight.
13907 \begin_layout Labeling
13908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13913 This is the Medium font series.
13914 It's also the default series.
13917 \begin_layout Labeling
13918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13925 This is the Bold font series.
13938 \begin_layout Labeling
13939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13944 As the name implies.
13949 \begin_layout Labeling
13950 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13955 This is the Upright font shape.
13956 It's also the default shape.
13959 \begin_layout Labeling
13960 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13974 s the Italic font shape
13980 \begin_layout Labeling
13981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13988 This is the Slanted font shape
13990 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
13991 , this is different from italic).
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13999 \begin_inset space ~
14006 This is the Small caps font shape
14013 \begin_layout Labeling
14014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14019 Alters the text color.
14020 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14024 \begin_inset space ~
14029 , which means that the document default color set in
14031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14032 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14038 \begin_inset space ~
14043 is used, you can choose between
14120 \begin_inset Index idx
14123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14132 \begin_layout Labeling
14133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14138 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14139 the language of the document.
14140 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14141 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14143 \begin_inset Newline newline
14146 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14148 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14149 When using the spell checking (see section
14150 \begin_inset space ~
14154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14156 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14160 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14163 \begin_layout Labeling
14164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14169 Alters the size of the font.
14170 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14171 proportional to the document font size.
14172 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14173 the details, but a general description of what
14179 \begin_layout Labeling
14180 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14201 arg "font-size tiny"
14207 \begin_layout Labeling
14208 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14229 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14235 \begin_layout Labeling
14236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14257 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14263 \begin_layout Labeling
14264 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14285 arg "font-size small"
14291 \begin_layout Labeling
14292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14306 It's also the default size.
14310 arg "font-size normal"
14316 \begin_layout Labeling
14317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14338 arg "font-size large"
14344 \begin_layout Labeling
14345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14366 arg "font-size larger"
14372 \begin_layout Labeling
14373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14394 arg "font-size largest"
14400 \begin_layout Labeling
14401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14422 arg "font-size huge"
14428 \begin_layout Labeling
14429 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14450 arg "font-size giant"
14456 \begin_layout Labeling
14457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14462 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14482 arg "font-size increase"
14488 \begin_layout Labeling
14489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14494 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14514 arg "font-size decrease"
14521 \begin_layout Standard
14526 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14527 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14529 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14530 — use those instead.
14531 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14534 \begin_layout Labeling
14535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14545 \begin_layout Labeling
14546 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 This is text with emphasize on
14556 This might seem like the same as
14560 , but it is actually a bit different.
14566 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14568 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14571 \begin_layout Labeling
14572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14579 This is text with Underbar on.
14585 arg "font-underline"
14591 \begin_inset Newline newline
14596 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14597 when you could not change fonts.
14598 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14599 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14600 because some people
14604 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14607 \begin_layout Labeling
14608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14619 This is text with Double underbar on.
14625 arg "font-underunderline"
14629 \begin_inset Newline newline
14632 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14633 about double underbar.
14636 \begin_layout Labeling
14637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14641 \begin_inset space ~
14648 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14654 arg "font-underwave"
14658 \begin_inset Newline newline
14661 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14662 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14665 \begin_layout Labeling
14666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14673 This is text with Strikeout on.
14679 arg "font-strikeout"
14683 \begin_inset Newline newline
14686 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14687 changed in the meantime.
14690 \begin_layout Labeling
14691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14698 This is text with Noun on.
14705 , this is a logical attribute.
14706 Normally it's equivalent to
14709 \begin_inset space ~
14718 \begin_layout Standard
14719 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14720 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14722 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14724 \begin_inset space ~
14727 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14733 arg "dialog-show character"
14736 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14737 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14740 arg "textstyle-apply"
14744 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14749 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14756 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14757 (suppose you just set the shape to
14758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14789 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14797 \begin_inset space ~
14809 \begin_layout Itemize
14815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14822 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14840 \begin_inset Newline newline
14844 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14858 \begin_inset Note Note
14861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14862 For more on phantoms see section
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14869 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14879 \begin_inset Newline newline
14885 \begin_layout Itemize
14890 fonts use characters with serifs.
14891 These are the small
14892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14899 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14900 The following example shows the difference:
14901 \begin_inset Newline newline
14905 \begin_inset Newline newline
14910 text without serifs
14913 \begin_inset Newline newline
14916 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14917 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14924 \begin_layout Itemize
14929 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14930 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14931 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14934 \begin_layout Standard
14935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14942 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14943 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14946 \begin_inset space ~
14951 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14952 the property to be removed.
14953 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14954 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14955 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14973 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14974 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14982 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14986 \begin_inset space ~
14991 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15002 If you, for example, set
15003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15021 \begin_inset space ~
15026 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15038 \begin_layout Standard
15039 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15040 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15043 \begin_layout Section
15044 Printing and Previewing
15047 \begin_layout Subsection
15051 \begin_layout Standard
15052 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15053 using \SpecialChar LyX
15054 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15055 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15056 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15057 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15059 Additional Features
15064 \begin_layout Standard
15066 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15069 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15070 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15071 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15074 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15075 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15076 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15077 to turn your writing into printable output.
15078 This happens in two stages:
15081 \begin_layout Enumerate
15082 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15083 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15085 a file with the extension,
15086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15100 \begin_layout Enumerate
15101 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15102 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15103 to use the commands in the
15107 file to produce printable output.
15110 \begin_layout Subsection
15111 Output file formats
15112 \begin_inset Index idx
15115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15124 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15132 Simple text (ASCII)
15133 \begin_inset Index idx
15136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15137 File formats ! ASCII
15145 \begin_layout Standard
15146 This file type has the extension
15147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15159 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15163 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 \begin_layout Standard
15171 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15173 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15174 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15176 \begin_inset space ~
15182 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15183 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15184 bibliography (section
15185 \begin_inset space ~
15189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15191 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15196 If your document includes such material, use
15198 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15199 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15201 \begin_inset space ~
15205 \begin_inset space ~
15209 \begin_inset space ~
15217 \begin_inset space ~
15221 \begin_inset space ~
15227 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15228 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15231 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15234 \begin_inset Index idx
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15238 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15247 \begin_layout Standard
15248 This file type has the extension
15249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15260 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15263 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15265 -Errors or to process it manually
15266 with console commands.
15267 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15268 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15269 's temporary directory whenever you
15270 view or export your document.
15273 \begin_layout Standard
15274 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15275 -file using the menu
15277 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15278 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15282 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15283 export variants are explained in section
15284 \begin_inset space ~
15288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15290 reference "subsec:Export"
15297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15299 \begin_inset Index idx
15302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15311 \begin_layout Standard
15312 This file type has the extension
15313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15333 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15334 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15335 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15339 \begin_layout Standard
15340 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15341 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15342 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15343 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15344 when you view the DVI.
15345 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15348 \begin_layout Standard
15349 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15351 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15352 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15358 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15360 \begin_inset space ~
15366 The latter option uses the program
15368 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15374 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15377 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15378 font access (see section
15379 \begin_inset space ~
15383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15385 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15390 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15391 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15398 \begin_inset Index idx
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15402 File formats ! PostScript
15410 \begin_layout Standard
15411 This file type has the extension
15412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15424 PostScript was developed by the company
15428 as a printer language.
15429 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15431 PostScript can be seen as a
15432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15435 programming language
15436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15439 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15444 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15451 \begin_inset Index idx
15454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15456 -packages ! pstricks
15466 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15469 \begin_layout Standard
15470 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15474 Encapsulated PostScript
15475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15478 (EPS, file extension
15479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 As \SpecialChar LyX
15492 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15493 convert them in the background to EPS.
15494 If, for example, you have 50
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15498 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15503 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15504 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15506 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15507 EPS to avoid this problem.
15510 \begin_layout Standard
15511 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15513 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15514 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15522 \begin_inset Index idx
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15532 \begin_inset Index idx
15535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 This file type has the extension
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 Portable Document Format
15563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15570 was derived from PostScript.
15571 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15580 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15581 looks exactly the same.
15584 \begin_layout Standard
15585 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15589 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 (JPG, file extension
15594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15621 Portable Network Graphics
15622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 (PNG, file extension
15626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15638 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15639 converts them in the
15640 background to one of these formats.
15641 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15642 will slow down your workflow.
15643 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15646 \begin_layout Standard
15647 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15649 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15655 \begin_layout Description
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15660 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15664 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15667 \begin_layout Description
15669 \begin_inset space ~
15676 ) This uses the program
15678 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15681 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15684 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15687 is a new engine, derived from
15691 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15692 access (see section
15693 \begin_inset space ~
15697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15699 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15704 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15705 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15710 \begin_layout Description
15712 \begin_inset space ~
15719 ) This uses the program
15724 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15730 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15731 font access (see section
15732 \begin_inset space ~
15736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15738 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15743 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15744 vertically written Japanese.
15747 \begin_layout Description
15749 \begin_inset space ~
15752 (cropped) This is the same as
15755 \begin_inset space ~
15760 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15761 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15762 to generate good-looking
15763 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15766 \begin_layout Description
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15771 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15775 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15779 \begin_layout Description
15781 \begin_inset space ~
15784 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15788 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15789 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15793 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15794 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15797 \begin_layout Standard
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15810 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15811 works without problems.
15812 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15813 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15817 \begin_inset space ~
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15830 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15840 \begin_inset Index idx
15843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15844 FileFormats ! XHTML
15850 \begin_inset Index idx
15853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15862 \begin_layout Standard
15863 This file type has the extension
15864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15876 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15877 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15878 When \SpecialChar LyX
15879 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15880 suitable for the purpose.
15881 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15884 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15887 between different formats, which are described in section
15889 Math Output in XHTML
15894 \begin_inset space ~
15902 \begin_layout Standard
15903 XHTML output remains
15904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15911 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15912 features are supported yet.
15916 and the World Wide Web
15920 Additional Features
15922 manual, for more information.
15925 \begin_layout Standard
15926 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15928 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15929 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15935 \begin_layout Subsection
15937 \begin_inset Index idx
15940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15949 \begin_layout Standard
15950 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15951 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15960 or use the toolbar button
15967 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15968 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15975 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15979 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15987 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15992 Further output formats can be selected via
15994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15995 View (Other Formats)
15997 or the toolbar button
15998 \begin_inset Graphics
15999 filename ../images/view-others.png
16001 groupId toolbarbuttons
16008 \begin_layout Standard
16009 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16010 viewer window using the menu
16012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 Update (Other Formats)
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16027 To have a real output, export your document.
16030 \begin_layout Section
16031 A few Words about Typography
16032 \begin_inset Index idx
16035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16044 \begin_layout Subsection
16045 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16046 \begin_inset Index idx
16049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16056 \begin_inset Index idx
16059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16068 \begin_layout Standard
16069 In \SpecialChar LyX
16071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16082 character comes in four lengths: the
16094 , and the minus sign:
16095 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16101 \begin_layout Standard
16102 \begin_inset Tabular
16103 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16104 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16105 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16106 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16107 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16108 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16177 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16204 \begin_inset space ~
16207 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16214 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16241 \begin_inset space ~
16244 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16265 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16299 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16305 \begin_layout Standard
16306 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16318 character multiple times in a row.
16319 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16320 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 \begin_layout Standard
16354 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16355 math mode and has a length of its own.
16356 Here are some examples:
16359 \begin_layout Enumerate
16360 line- and page-breaks
16361 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16371 \begin_layout Enumerate
16373 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16383 \begin_layout Enumerate
16384 Oh — there's a dash.
16385 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16395 \begin_layout Enumerate
16396 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16400 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16410 \begin_layout Subsection
16412 \begin_inset Index idx
16415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16424 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16431 \begin_layout Standard
16432 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16433 but automatically in the output.
16434 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16440 \begin_inset Index idx
16443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16450 following the rules of the document language.
16453 \begin_layout Standard
16455 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16459 font and with unusual constructs, like
16460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16468 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16469 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16470 This is done with the menu
16472 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16473 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16475 \begin_inset space ~
16481 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16483 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16487 \begin_layout Standard
16488 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16489 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16500 would then see the hyphen
16501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16508 as a hyphenation possibility.
16509 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16510 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16511 as described in section
16512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16515 Prevent Hyphenation
16516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16522 \begin_inset space ~
16530 \begin_layout Subsection
16532 \begin_inset Index idx
16535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16544 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16545 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16548 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16555 \begin_layout Standard
16556 When \SpecialChar LyX
16557 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16558 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16566 appropriate amount of space.
16567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16570 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16572 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16573 gets after another word.
16576 \begin_layout Standard
16577 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16578 not work in all cases.
16580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16591 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16592 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16595 \begin_layout Standard
16596 Here are some examples of
16600 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16603 \begin_layout Itemize
16608 \begin_layout Itemize
16613 \begin_layout Standard
16614 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16617 \begin_layout Itemize
16619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16623 this is too much space!
16626 \begin_layout Itemize
16631 \begin_layout Standard
16632 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16635 \begin_layout Standard
16636 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16639 \begin_layout Enumerate
16643 \begin_inset space ~
16648 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16655 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16660 \begin_inset Index idx
16663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16664 Spaces ! inter-word
16672 \begin_layout Enumerate
16676 \begin_inset space ~
16681 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16682 \begin_inset space ~
16686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16688 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16693 \begin_inset Index idx
16696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16705 \begin_layout Enumerate
16709 \begin_inset space ~
16713 \begin_inset space ~
16717 \begin_inset space ~
16724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16726 \begin_inset space ~
16731 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16732 This function is also bound to
16735 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16741 \begin_layout Standard
16742 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16745 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16751 \begin_inset space \space{}
16754 this is too much space!
16757 \begin_layout Itemize
16758 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16762 \begin_layout Standard
16763 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16764 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16766 will take care of this.
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16774 \begin_inset space ~
16780 feature described in the section
16782 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16787 Additional Features
16792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16794 \begin_inset Index idx
16797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16798 Typography ! Quotes
16804 \begin_inset Index idx
16807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16838 \begin_layout Standard
16840 usually sets quotes correctly.
16841 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16842 and use a closing quote at the end.
16844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16852 The keyboard character,
16856 , generates this automatically.
16859 \begin_layout Standard
16860 You can specify what character the
16864 key produces using the submenu
16870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16874 \begin_inset Index idx
16877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16878 Document ! Settings
16888 There are six choices:
16891 \begin_layout Labeling
16892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 \begin_layout Labeling
16916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16919 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16923 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16929 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16933 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16939 \begin_layout Labeling
16940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16943 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16947 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16953 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16957 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16963 \begin_layout Labeling
16964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16967 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16971 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16977 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16981 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16987 \begin_layout Labeling
16988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16991 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16995 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17001 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17005 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17011 \begin_layout Labeling
17012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17015 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17019 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17025 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17029 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17035 \begin_layout Standard
17036 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17039 arg "quote-insert single"
17045 \begin_layout Subsection
17047 \begin_inset Index idx
17050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17051 Typography ! Ligatures
17057 \begin_inset Index idx
17060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17091 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17098 \begin_layout Standard
17099 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17100 print them as single characters.
17101 These groups are known as
17106 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17107 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17109 Here are the standard ligatures:
17112 \begin_layout Itemize
17116 \begin_layout Itemize
17120 \begin_layout Itemize
17124 \begin_layout Itemize
17128 \begin_layout Itemize
17132 \begin_layout Standard
17133 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17136 \begin_layout Standard
17137 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17138 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17146 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17162 To break a ligature, use
17164 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17165 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17167 \begin_inset space ~
17174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17185 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17202 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17210 \begin_layout Subsection
17212 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17214 \begin_inset Index idx
17217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17227 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17234 \begin_layout Standard
17237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17241 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17244 \begin_layout Description
17246 The name of the game.
17249 \begin_layout Description
17251 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17255 \begin_layout Description
17257 The \SpecialChar TeX
17258 macro colletion used by \SpecialChar LyX
17262 \begin_layout Description
17263 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17264 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17268 \begin_layout Standard
17269 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17275 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17283 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17284 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17285 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17286 converges to the number
17287 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17290 : The actual version is
17291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17299 , the previous one was
17300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17311 \begin_layout Subsection
17313 \begin_inset Index idx
17316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17325 \begin_layout Standard
17326 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17327 space between two words.
17328 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17338 for units use the menu
17340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17341 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17343 \begin_inset space ~
17351 arg "space-insert thin"
17357 \begin_layout Standard
17358 Here is an example to show the differences:
17361 \begin_layout Standard
17362 \begin_inset Tabular
17363 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17364 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17365 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17366 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17389 space between number and unit
17396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17405 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17417 half space between number and unit
17430 \begin_layout Subsection
17432 \begin_inset Index idx
17435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17436 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17444 \begin_layout Standard
17445 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17447 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17448 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17449 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17450 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17451 These bits of text became known as
17462 \begin_layout Standard
17463 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17464 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17465 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17466 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17467 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17468 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17469 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17470 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17471 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17472 \begin_inset Newline newline
17480 \begin_inset Newline newline
17488 \begin_inset Newline newline
17491 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17492 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17493 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17495 \begin_inset space ~
17499 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17501 key "latexcompanion"
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17516 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17517 's page break mechanism.
17520 \begin_layout Chapter
17521 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17524 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17532 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17541 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17544 \begin_layout Section
17546 \begin_inset Index idx
17549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17565 \begin_layout Standard
17567 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17570 \begin_layout Description
17573 \begin_inset space ~
17576 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17577 \begin_inset Newline newline
17581 \begin_inset Note Note
17584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17585 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17593 \begin_layout Description
17594 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17595 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17596 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17599 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17600 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17602 \begin_inset space ~
17608 \begin_inset Newline newline
17612 \begin_inset Note Comment
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17616 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17625 \begin_layout Description
17627 \begin_inset space ~
17630 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17631 set in the document settings under
17633 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17641 \begin_inset Newline newline
17645 \begin_inset Newline newline
17649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17658 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17659 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17664 of a comment that appears in the output.
17670 \begin_inset Newline newline
17674 \begin_inset Newline newline
17677 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17680 \begin_layout Standard
17681 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17693 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17696 \begin_layout Section
17698 \begin_inset Index idx
17701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17710 name "sec:Footnotes"
17717 \begin_layout Standard
17719 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17725 or the toolbar button
17728 arg "footnote-insert"
17740 \begin_inset Graphics
17741 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17750 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17751 's representation of your footnote.
17761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17780 label, the box will
17784 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17785 Clicking on the box label again will close
17798 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17799 and click on the footnote
17814 \begin_layout Standard
17815 Here is an example footnote:
17823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17824 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17832 \begin_layout Standard
17833 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17834 position where the footnote box is placed.
17835 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17836 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
17837 according to the document class.
17839 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
17840 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
17846 ey are described in the
17849 \begin_inset space ~
17857 \begin_layout Section
17859 \begin_inset Index idx
17862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17871 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17878 \begin_layout Standard
17879 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
17881 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17885 \begin_inset space ~
17890 or the toolbar button
17893 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17919 appearing within your text.
17920 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17921 's representation of your margin
17930 \begin_layout Standard
17931 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17935 \begin_inset Marginal
17938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17940 This is a marginal note.
17948 \begin_layout Standard
17949 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17950 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17951 pages, right on odd pages.
17954 \begin_layout Standard
17955 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17958 \begin_inset space ~
17966 \begin_inset space ~
17974 \begin_layout Section
17975 Graphics and Images
17976 \begin_inset Index idx
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17986 \begin_inset Index idx
17989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17998 name "sec:Graphics"
18005 \begin_layout Standard
18006 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18007 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18010 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18022 \begin_layout Standard
18023 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18028 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18029 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18031 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18032 \begin_inset space ~
18036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18038 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18045 \begin_layout Standard
18050 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18051 of the image in the output.
18052 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18056 \begin_inset space ~
18060 \begin_inset space ~
18069 \begin_inset space ~
18073 \begin_inset space ~
18077 \begin_inset space ~
18082 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18083 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18091 \begin_layout Standard
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18099 \begin_inset space ~
18104 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18105 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18107 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18112 \begin_inset space ~
18117 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18118 with the image size is printed.
18121 \begin_layout Standard
18122 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18123 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18125 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18128 \begin_layout Standard
18130 \begin_inset Graphics
18131 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18139 \begin_layout Standard
18140 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18141 the image into a float, see section
18142 \begin_inset space ~
18146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18148 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18155 \begin_layout Subsection
18157 \begin_inset Index idx
18160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18169 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18176 \begin_layout Standard
18177 You can insert images in any known file format.
18178 But as we explained in section
18179 \begin_inset space ~
18183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18185 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18189 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18191 therefore uses the program
18195 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18196 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18197 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18204 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18211 \begin_layout Standard
18212 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18215 \begin_layout Description
18217 \begin_inset space ~
18220 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18221 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18222 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18226 Graphics Interchange Format
18227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18230 (GIF, file extension
18231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18243 \begin_inset Index idx
18246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18278 Portable Network Graphics
18279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18282 (PNG, file extension
18283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18295 \begin_inset Index idx
18298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18330 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18334 (JPG, file extension
18335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 \begin_inset Index idx
18362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18393 \begin_layout Description
18395 \begin_inset space ~
18398 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18400 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18401 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18402 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18403 \begin_inset Newline newline
18406 Scalable image formats can be
18407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 Scalable Vector Graphics
18411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18414 (SVG, file extension
18415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18427 \begin_inset Index idx
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18462 Encapsulated PostScript
18463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18466 (EPS, file extension
18467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18479 \begin_inset Index idx
18482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18514 Portable Document Format
18515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 (PDF, file extension
18519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18531 \begin_inset Index idx
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18549 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18550 result will not be scalable.
18551 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18557 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18565 \begin_layout Standard
18566 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18573 \begin_layout Subsection
18574 Grouping of Image Settings
18575 \begin_inset Index idx
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18579 Images ! Settings grouping
18587 \begin_layout Standard
18588 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18590 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18591 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18593 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18594 need to manually change each of them.
18598 \begin_layout Standard
18599 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18606 \begin_inset space ~
18618 \begin_inset space ~
18622 \begin_inset space ~
18628 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18629 and checking the name of the desired group.
18632 \begin_layout Section
18634 \begin_inset Index idx
18637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18653 \begin_layout Standard
18654 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18657 arg "tabular-insert"
18662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18666 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18667 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18668 from the rest of the table.
18669 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18670 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18672 Here is an example table:
18675 \begin_layout Standard
18677 \begin_inset Tabular
18678 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18679 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18683 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18883 \begin_layout Subsection
18887 \begin_layout Standard
18888 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18891 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
18895 This brings up the table dialog.
18896 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18897 cursor is placed currently.
18898 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18899 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18900 done on all of your selection.
18903 \begin_layout Standard
18904 In addition to the table dialog, the
18907 \begin_inset space ~
18912 helps you in setting table properties.
18913 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18916 \begin_layout Standard
18920 \begin_inset space ~
18925 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18926 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18927 current cell respectively.
18928 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18930 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18931 of text, see section
18932 \begin_inset space ~
18936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18938 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
18945 \begin_layout Standard
18946 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18947 using the check box
18956 This will merge the cells to
18960 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18961 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18962 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18963 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18964 in the last row without the upper border:
18967 \begin_layout Standard
18969 \begin_inset Tabular
18970 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18971 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18972 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18973 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
18974 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18975 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18995 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19106 \begin_layout Standard
19107 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19108 -arguments for the table.
19109 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19110 explained in the chapter
19117 \begin_inset space ~
19123 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19124 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19125 but are visible in the output.
19128 \begin_layout Standard
19129 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19137 Most DVI-viewers are
19141 able to display rotations.
19149 \begin_layout Standard
19154 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19159 adds lines for all cell borders.
19162 \begin_layout Subsection
19164 \begin_inset Index idx
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19168 Tables ! Longtables
19174 \begin_inset Index idx
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19186 \begin_layout Standard
19187 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19190 \begin_inset space ~
19194 \begin_inset space ~
19203 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19204 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19207 \begin_layout Description
19212 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19213 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19214 except for the first page, if
19217 \begin_inset space ~
19225 \begin_layout Description
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19234 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19235 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19238 \begin_layout Description
19243 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19244 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19245 except for the last page, if
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19256 \begin_layout Description
19260 \begin_inset space ~
19265 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19266 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19269 \begin_layout Description
19270 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19271 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19277 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19280 \begin_inset space ~
19288 \begin_layout Standard
19289 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19290 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19291 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19297 In this context, first means first in this order:
19300 \begin_inset space ~
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19317 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19320 \begin_layout Standard
19322 \begin_inset Tabular
19323 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19324 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19325 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19326 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19327 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19328 <row endfirsthead="true">
19329 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19335 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19349 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19359 <row endfirsthead="true">
19360 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19371 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 <row endhead="true">
19393 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19404 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19413 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <row endhead="true">
19424 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19435 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19444 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19456 <row endfoot="true">
19457 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19477 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19508 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20449 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20458 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 <row endlastfoot="true">
21439 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21459 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 \begin_layout Subsection
21478 \begin_inset Index idx
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21490 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21497 \begin_layout Standard
21498 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21499 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21500 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21501 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21505 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21508 \begin_layout Standard
21509 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21510 for the column in the table dialog.
21511 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21512 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21516 \begin_layout Standard
21518 \begin_inset Tabular
21519 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21520 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21522 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21523 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 This is longer now.
21673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21725 This is longer now.
21730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 \begin_layout Standard
21757 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21758 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21764 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21770 Selection with the mouse or with
21774 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21775 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21776 the selection from outside the table.
21779 \begin_layout Section
21781 \begin_inset Index idx
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21800 \begin_layout Subsection
21804 \begin_layout Standard
21805 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21806 have a fixed location.
21808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21815 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21823 \begin_inset space ~
21828 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21829 too many notes on the current page.
21832 \begin_layout Standard
21833 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21834 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21835 and pages without text.
21836 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21837 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21838 Floats are therefore numbered.
21839 Referencing is described in section
21840 \begin_inset space ~
21844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21846 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21853 \begin_layout Standard
21854 To insert a float, use the menu
21856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21860 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21861 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21863 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21864 \begin_inset Index idx
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21874 paragraph within the float.
21875 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
21876 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
21877 left-clicking on the box label.
21878 A closed float box looks like this:
21879 \begin_inset Graphics
21880 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21885 – a gray button with a red label.
21888 \begin_layout Standard
21889 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
21891 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21894 \begin_layout Subsection
21896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21898 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21903 \begin_inset Index idx
21906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 Floats ! Figure floats
21915 \begin_layout Standard
21917 \begin_inset space ~
21921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21923 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21927 was created using the menu
21929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21930 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
21936 arg "float-insert figure"
21940 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21949 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21953 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21954 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21956 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
21958 \begin_inset space ~
21966 arg "layout-paragraph"
21972 \begin_layout Standard
21973 \begin_inset Float figure
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21980 \begin_inset Graphics
21981 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21996 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22000 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22013 \begin_layout Standard
22014 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22015 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22026 ) and refer to it using the menu
22028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22034 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22038 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22039 vague references like
22040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22047 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22048 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22058 For more about cross-references, see section
22059 \begin_inset space ~
22063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22065 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22072 \begin_layout Standard
22073 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22074 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22075 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22076 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22077 as described in section
22078 \begin_inset space ~
22082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22084 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22090 \begin_inset space ~
22094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22096 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22100 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22101 You can also set the images one below the other.
22103 \begin_inset space ~
22107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22109 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22116 reference "fig:Platypus"
22120 are the subfigures.
22123 \begin_layout Standard
22124 \begin_inset Float figure
22129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22130 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22134 \begin_inset Float figure
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22140 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22145 name "fig:Undefinable"
22157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 \begin_inset Graphics
22159 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22170 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22174 \begin_inset Float figure
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22180 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22185 name "fig:Platypus"
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 \begin_inset Graphics
22199 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22211 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22223 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22227 Two distorted images.
22240 \begin_layout Subsection
22242 \begin_inset Index idx
22245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 Floats ! Table floats
22254 \begin_layout Standard
22255 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22258 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22261 or the toolbar button
22264 arg "float-insert table"
22268 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22269 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22270 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22272 \begin_inset space ~
22276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22278 reference "tab:Table-float"
22285 \begin_layout Standard
22286 \begin_inset Float table
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22295 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22297 name "tab:Table-float"
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 \begin_inset Tabular
22312 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22313 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22314 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22315 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22316 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22464 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22467 \end{array}\right]$
22475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22509 \begin_layout Subsection
22511 \begin_inset Index idx
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 \begin_layout Standard
22525 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22526 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22527 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22529 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22537 \begin_inset space ~
22545 \begin_layout Section
22547 \begin_inset Index idx
22550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 \begin_layout Standard
22561 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22563 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22564 \begin_inset space \space{}
22571 \begin_layout Standard
22572 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22573 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22579 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22580 and its alignment within the page.
22583 \begin_layout Standard
22585 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22595 height_special "totalheight"
22600 backgroundcolor "none"
22603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22606 This is a minipage.
22607 The text is set in an italic style.
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22613 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22614 another formatting.
22622 \begin_layout Standard
22623 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22626 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22630 as described in section
22631 \begin_inset space ~
22635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22637 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22642 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22648 \begin_layout Standard
22649 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22659 height_special "totalheight"
22664 backgroundcolor "none"
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22668 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22669 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22675 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22679 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22689 height_special "totalheight"
22694 backgroundcolor "none"
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22699 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22707 \begin_layout Standard
22708 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22714 \begin_layout Standard
22715 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22717 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22724 \begin_inset space ~
22732 \begin_layout Chapter
22733 Mathematical Formulas
22734 \begin_inset Index idx
22737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22744 \begin_inset Index idx
22747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22778 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22785 \begin_layout Standard
22786 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22791 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22794 \begin_layout Section
22796 \begin_inset Index idx
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22808 \begin_layout Standard
22809 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22822 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22824 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22825 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22826 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22834 \begin_layout Standard
22835 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22839 \begin_inset space ~
22844 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22849 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22852 \begin_layout Standard
22853 This is a line with an inline formula
22854 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22860 \begin_layout Standard
22861 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22862 paragraph, like this one:
22863 \begin_inset Formula
22870 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22873 \begin_layout Standard
22875 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
22877 For example, typing
22878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22891 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22892 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22896 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22899 \begin_inset space ~
22907 \begin_layout Subsection
22908 Navigating in Formulas
22909 \begin_inset Index idx
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22921 \begin_layout Standard
22922 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22923 achieved with the arrow keys.
22925 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22926 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22931 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22932 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22936 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22940 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22943 \end{array}\right]$
22951 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22956 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22957 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22960 \begin_layout Standard
22965 , printed in this document as
22966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22970 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22977 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22978 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22979 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22984 For example, if you want
22985 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22993 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23003 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23007 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23012 , since in the latter case only the
23015 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23020 will be under the square root sign:
23021 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23027 \begin_layout Standard
23028 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23030 \begin_inset Formula
23032 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23041 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23042 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23045 \begin_layout Subsection
23049 \begin_layout Standard
23050 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23051 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23055 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23056 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23057 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23058 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23059 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23063 \begin_layout Subsection
23064 Exponents and Subscripts
23065 \begin_inset Index idx
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 \begin_inset Index idx
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 \begin_layout Standard
23088 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23091 arg "math-superscript"
23097 arg "math-subscript"
23100 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23102 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23105 , type in a formula
23108 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23118 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23124 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23128 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23134 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23140 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23149 , you have to use an extra
23153 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23154 For example, if you want
23155 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23161 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23167 Subscripts are similar: To get
23168 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23174 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23182 \begin_layout Subsection
23184 \begin_inset Index idx
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23196 \begin_layout Standard
23197 Create a fraction either with the command
23203 or by using the icon
23206 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23212 \begin_inset space ~
23218 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23219 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23220 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23225 To move back up, press
23230 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23231 \begin_inset Formula
23233 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23236 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23244 \begin_layout Subsection
23246 \begin_inset Index idx
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23258 \begin_layout Standard
23259 Roots can be created using the
23262 \begin_inset space ~
23270 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23276 arg "math-insert \\root"
23298 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23304 always produces a square root.
23307 \begin_layout Subsection
23308 Operators with Limits
23309 \begin_inset Index idx
23312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 \begin_inset Index idx
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23331 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23338 \begin_layout Standard
23340 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23344 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23347 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23348 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23349 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23350 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23351 The sum operator will automatically place its
23352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23359 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23361 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23365 \begin_inset Formula
23367 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23372 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23376 \begin_layout Standard
23377 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23379 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23380 behind the operator and using the menu
23382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23383 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23385 \begin_inset space ~
23389 \begin_inset space ~
23403 \begin_layout Standard
23404 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23413 \begin_inset Index idx
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 \begin_inset Formula
23425 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23430 which will place the
23431 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23443 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23444 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23450 \begin_layout Standard
23451 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23458 Have a look at section
23459 \begin_inset space ~
23463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23465 reference "subsec:Functions"
23469 for an explanation of function macros.
23472 \begin_layout Subsection
23474 \begin_inset Index idx
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 \begin_layout Standard
23487 Most math symbols can be found in the
23490 \begin_inset space ~
23495 under one of several categories; including
23512 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23516 \begin_layout Standard
23517 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23518 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23519 don't have to use the
23522 \begin_inset space ~
23527 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23529 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23532 \begin_layout Subsection
23534 \begin_inset Index idx
23537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23546 \begin_layout Standard
23547 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23553 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23559 \begin_inset space ~
23567 arg "math-insert \\space"
23571 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23572 For example, the sequence
23577 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23580 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23582 \begin_inset Graphics
23583 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23588 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23589 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23590 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23591 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23592 , because they are negative
23594 Here are two examples:
23597 \begin_layout Standard
23607 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23613 \begin_layout Standard
23623 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23629 \begin_layout Subsection
23631 \begin_inset Index idx
23634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23643 name "subsec:Functions"
23650 \begin_layout Standard
23654 \begin_inset space ~
23659 contains under the button
23662 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23665 a number of function macros, such as
23666 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23670 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23678 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23685 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23686 avoid confusions, because
23687 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23691 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23697 \begin_layout Standard
23698 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23700 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23704 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23710 \begin_layout Standard
23711 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23712 are placed, as described in section
23713 \begin_inset space ~
23717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23719 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23726 \begin_layout Subsection
23728 \begin_inset Index idx
23731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 \begin_layout Standard
23741 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23743 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23744 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23745 commands, for example, to enter
23746 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23749 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23750 Our example is entered by typing
23755 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23762 \begin_inset space ~
23766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23768 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23772 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23775 \begin_layout Standard
23776 \begin_inset Float table
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23782 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23787 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23791 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 \begin_inset Tabular
23802 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23803 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23804 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23805 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24106 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24160 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24214 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24367 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24388 \begin_layout Standard
24389 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24392 \begin_inset space ~
24400 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24403 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24407 \begin_layout Section
24408 Brackets and Delimiters
24409 \begin_inset Index idx
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24419 \begin_inset Index idx
24422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24431 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24438 \begin_layout Standard
24439 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24441 For some purposes, using just the keys
24446 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24447 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24448 toolbar delimiter icon
24451 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24455 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24456 \begin_inset Formula
24458 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24466 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24467 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24471 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24474 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24480 \begin_inset Formula
24482 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24490 \begin_layout Standard
24491 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24492 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24496 \begin_layout Standard
24497 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24498 left side and right side.
24499 If you use the option
24502 \begin_inset space ~
24507 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24508 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24510 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24515 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24516 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24519 \begin_layout Standard
24520 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24521 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24522 is to go inside the brackets.
24523 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24528 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24529 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24530 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24534 arg "math-delim ( )"
24540 \begin_layout Section
24541 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24542 \begin_inset Index idx
24545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24552 \begin_inset Index idx
24555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24562 \begin_inset Index idx
24565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24574 \begin_layout Standard
24575 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24579 \begin_inset space ~
24587 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24591 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24592 Here is an example:
24593 \begin_inset Formula
24595 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24604 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24605 \begin_inset space ~
24609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24611 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24616 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24617 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24618 This alignment is set in the box
24623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24672 for every column as default.
24673 For example, the sequence
24674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24685 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24686 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24687 corresponds to the relevant column.
24688 The result will look like this:
24689 \begin_inset Formula
24692 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24693 column & has & has\,right\\
24694 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24703 \begin_layout Standard
24704 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24707 arg "newline-insert newline"
24710 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24711 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24713 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24716 or the math toolbar.
24719 \begin_layout Standard
24720 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24721 It can be created with the menu
24723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24724 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24726 \begin_inset space ~
24738 Here is an example:
24739 \begin_inset Formula
24753 \begin_layout Standard
24754 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24757 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24760 arg "newline-insert newline"
24764 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24769 arg "newline-insert newline"
24772 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24780 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24781 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24782 A new row is created by every further entry of
24785 arg "newline-insert newline"
24789 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24790 Here is an example:
24791 \begin_inset Formula
24793 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24794 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24799 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24800 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24801 \begin_inset Formula
24803 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24811 \begin_layout Standard
24812 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24819 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24820 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24823 reference "eq:asquared"
24828 The other types are described in section
24829 \begin_inset space ~
24833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24835 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
24842 \begin_layout Section
24843 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24844 \begin_inset Index idx
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24848 Math ! Formula numbering
24854 \begin_inset Index idx
24857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 Math ! Referencing formulas
24864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24866 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24873 \begin_layout Standard
24874 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24877 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24879 \begin_inset space ~
24883 \begin_inset space ~
24891 arg "math-number-toggle"
24895 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24896 within parentheses.
24897 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24898 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24899 the document class.
24900 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24901 separated by a dot:
24902 \begin_inset Formula
24912 arg "math-number-toggle"
24915 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24916 You can only number displayed formulas.
24919 \begin_layout Standard
24920 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24922 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24923 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24925 \begin_inset space ~
24929 \begin_inset space ~
24937 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24940 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24941 \begin_inset Formula
24944 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24950 To number all lines use the shortcut
24953 arg "math-number-toggle"
24959 \begin_layout Standard
24960 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24963 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24964 A label is inserted with the menu
24966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24975 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24976 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24977 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24989 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24990 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24991 We inserted in the following example the label
24992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24999 in the second line:
25000 \begin_inset Formula
25002 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25003 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25008 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25009 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25010 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25014 \begin_inset space ~
25022 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25026 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25027 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25028 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25029 as the formula number:
25032 \begin_layout Standard
25033 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25036 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25043 \begin_layout Standard
25044 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25045 's cross-reference box are described in section
25046 \begin_inset space ~
25050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25052 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25057 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25065 \begin_layout Section
25066 User defined math macros
25067 \begin_inset Index idx
25070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 \begin_layout Standard
25081 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25082 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25083 Math macros are explained in section
25086 \begin_inset space ~
25098 \begin_layout Section
25102 \begin_layout Subsection
25104 \begin_inset Index idx
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 \begin_layout Standard
25117 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25118 To set a font in a formula, use the
25121 \begin_inset space ~
25129 arg "math-insert \\font"
25132 , or enter its command, listed in table
25133 \begin_inset space ~
25137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25139 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25146 \begin_layout Standard
25147 \begin_inset Float table
25152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25158 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25162 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset Tabular
25173 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25174 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25175 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25235 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25262 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25383 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25444 \begin_layout Standard
25445 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25453 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25469 \begin_layout Standard
25470 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25471 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25476 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25477 space when you need a space in the box.
25478 Here is an example where
25479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25490 denotes the set of numbers:
25491 \begin_inset Formula
25493 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25501 \begin_layout Standard
25502 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25503 You can, for example, put a character in
25512 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25516 \begin_inset Newline newline
25519 So it is better not to use this feature.
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25523 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25524 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25528 \begin_inset Newline newline
25531 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25537 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25538 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25544 \begin_layout Standard
25551 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25554 \begin_layout Standard
25555 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25557 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25558 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25560 \begin_inset space ~
25568 \begin_layout Subsection
25570 \begin_inset Index idx
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 \begin_layout Standard
25583 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25585 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25589 \begin_inset space ~
25593 \begin_inset space ~
25601 \begin_inset space ~
25609 arg "math-insert \\font"
25613 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25614 in black instead of blue.
25615 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25616 Here is an example:
25617 \begin_inset Formula
25620 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25621 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25630 \begin_layout Subsection
25632 \begin_inset Index idx
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 \begin_layout Standard
25645 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25646 automatically chosen in most situations.
25664 For most characters,
25672 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25673 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25678 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25679 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25680 thinks are appropriate.
25681 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25684 arg "math-insert \\style"
25688 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25689 For example, you can set
25690 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25693 , which is normally in
25702 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25706 The four styles are used in the following example:
25709 \begin_layout Standard
25710 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25714 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25718 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25722 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25728 \begin_layout Standard
25729 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25730 is set in a particular size with the menu
25732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25734 \begin_inset space ~
25739 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25740 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25741 will be adjusted to correspond.
25742 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25753 \begin_layout Standard
25757 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25763 \begin_layout Section
25764 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25766 \begin_inset Index idx
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25776 \begin_inset Index idx
25779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25788 \begin_layout Standard
25790 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25791 that are in common use.
25794 \begin_layout Subsection
25795 Enabling AMS-Support
25798 \begin_layout Standard
25799 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25800 the document by selecting the checkbox
25803 \begin_inset space ~
25807 \begin_inset space ~
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25822 \begin_inset Index idx
25825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25826 Document ! Settings
25834 \begin_inset space ~
25840 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
25841 -errors in formulas,
25842 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25845 \begin_layout Subsection
25847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25849 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25854 \begin_inset Index idx
25857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25858 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25866 \begin_layout Standard
25867 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25868 provides a selection of different formula types.
25870 allows you to choose between
25891 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25898 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25901 \begin_layout Chapter
25905 \begin_layout Section
25907 \begin_inset Index idx
25910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25919 name "sec:Cross-References"
25926 \begin_layout Standard
25927 One of \SpecialChar LyX
25928 's strengths is cross-references.
25929 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25931 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25932 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25933 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25936 \begin_layout Enumerate
25940 \begin_layout Enumerate
25941 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25943 name "enu:Second-item"
25950 \begin_layout Enumerate
25954 \begin_layout Standard
25955 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25960 or by pressing the toolbar button
25967 A gray label box like this:
25968 \begin_inset Graphics
25969 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25974 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25976 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26011 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26012 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26028 \begin_layout Standard
26029 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26031 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26034 or the toolbar button
26037 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26041 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26042 \begin_inset Graphics
26043 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26048 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26050 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26063 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26067 \begin_layout Standard
26068 As an alternative to
26070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26073 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26078 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26079 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 \begin_layout Standard
26094 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26095 \begin_inset space ~
26099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26101 reference "enu:Second-item"
26108 \begin_layout Standard
26109 It is recommended to use a protected space
26113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26114 described in section
26115 \begin_inset space ~
26119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26121 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26130 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26131 line breaks between them.
26134 \begin_layout Standard
26135 There are six formats of cross-references:
26138 \begin_layout Description
26139 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26142 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26149 \begin_layout Description
26150 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26151 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26163 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26170 \begin_layout Description
26171 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26177 LatexCommand pageref
26178 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26185 \begin_layout Description
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26191 \begin_inset space ~
26194 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26196 LatexCommand vpageref
26197 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26202 \begin_inset Newline newline
26205 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26206 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26207 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26208 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26209 it prints “on the next page”.
26210 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26213 \begin_layout Description
26215 \begin_inset space ~
26219 \begin_inset space ~
26223 \begin_inset space ~
26226 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26229 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26234 \begin_inset Newline newline
26237 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26243 ; otherwise it behaves like
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26260 \begin_layout Description
26262 \begin_inset space ~
26265 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26266 \begin_inset Newline newline
26270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26288 \begin_inset Index idx
26291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 -packages ! prettyref
26299 \begin_inset Index idx
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26304 -packages ! refstyle
26315 \begin_inset Newline newline
26318 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26319 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26322 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26327 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26335 is the default and preferred because
26339 supports only English documents.
26340 The format is specified by using the command
26352 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26353 preamble of the document.
26354 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26367 ) can be done with this command
26368 \begin_inset Newline newline
26375 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26380 \begin_inset Newline newline
26383 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26387 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26394 \begin_layout Description
26396 \begin_inset space ~
26399 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26401 LatexCommand nameref
26402 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26409 \begin_layout Standard
26410 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26411 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26413 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26417 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26421 \begin_layout Standard
26422 You can only use the style
26426 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26430 is always possible.
26433 \begin_layout Standard
26434 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26435 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26437 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26438 \begin_inset space ~
26442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26444 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26451 \begin_layout Standard
26452 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26456 \begin_inset space ~
26460 \begin_inset space ~
26465 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26466 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26469 \begin_inset space ~
26474 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26475 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26478 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26484 \begin_layout Standard
26485 You can change labels at any time.
26486 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26487 do not need to think about this.
26490 \begin_layout Standard
26491 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26493 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26497 \begin_layout Standard
26498 References are described in detail in the section
26499 \begin_inset space ~
26503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26513 \begin_inset space ~
26521 \begin_layout Section
26522 Table of Contents and other Listings
26523 \begin_inset Index idx
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26533 \begin_inset Index idx
26536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26552 \begin_layout Subsection
26554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26556 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26563 \begin_layout Standard
26564 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26567 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26569 \begin_inset space ~
26573 \begin_inset space ~
26579 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26581 If you click on it, the
26585 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26586 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26587 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26589 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26596 that is described in section
26597 \begin_inset space ~
26601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26603 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26610 \begin_layout Standard
26611 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26612 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26614 \begin_inset space ~
26618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26620 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26624 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26626 \begin_inset space ~
26630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26632 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26636 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26638 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26641 \begin_layout Subsection
26642 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26645 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26652 \begin_layout Standard
26653 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26655 You can insert them via the
26657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26661 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26664 \begin_layout Section
26665 URLs and Hyperlinks
26666 \begin_inset Index idx
26669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26676 \begin_inset Index idx
26679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 \begin_layout Subsection
26690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26708 \begin_layout Standard
26709 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26711 \begin_inset Flex URL
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 \begin_layout Standard
26725 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26731 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26735 \begin_layout Standard
26736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26753 \begin_layout Subsection
26755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26757 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26764 \begin_layout Standard
26765 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26770 or with the toolbar button
26777 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26786 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26787 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26790 name "LyX's homepage"
26791 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26795 , an Email address like this:
26796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26798 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26799 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26804 , or a link to a file.
26807 \begin_layout Standard
26808 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26821 to the link target.
26824 \begin_layout Standard
26825 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26826 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26827 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26828 the text style dialog.
26829 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26833 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26835 name "LyX's homepage"
26836 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26843 \begin_layout Standard
26844 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26848 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26850 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26851 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26855 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26857 \begin_inset Newline newline
26865 \begin_inset Newline newline
26872 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26875 \begin_layout Section
26877 \begin_inset Index idx
26880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26889 name "sec:Appendices"
26896 \begin_layout Standard
26897 Appendices are created with the menu
26899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26901 \begin_inset space ~
26905 \begin_inset space ~
26911 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26912 as the appendix part of the book.
26913 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26916 \begin_layout Standard
26917 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26918 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26919 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26920 and the subsection number.
26921 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26925 \begin_layout Standard
26927 \begin_inset space ~
26931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26933 reference "chap:Credits"
26938 \begin_inset space ~
26942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26944 reference "subsec:Export"
26951 \begin_layout Section
26953 \begin_inset Index idx
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26965 name "sec:Bibliography"
26972 \begin_layout Standard
26973 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
26975 You can include a bibliography database,
26979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26980 Known under the name
26981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26984 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
26986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26994 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26995 manually, using the paragraph environment
26999 , which was described in section
27000 \begin_inset space ~
27004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27006 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27011 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27012 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27016 use a bibliography database.
27019 \begin_layout Subsection
27020 The Bibliography Environment
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27028 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27030 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27039 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27041 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27051 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27055 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27057 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27060 or the toolbar button
27063 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27067 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27068 containing the available citations.
27069 Select one or more keys from the list and
27079 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27080 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27084 \begin_layout Standard
27085 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27086 entry with surrounding brackets.
27091 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27092 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27104 \begin_layout Standard
27108 Companion Second Edition
27111 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27113 key "latexcompanion"
27120 \begin_layout Standard
27121 The \SpecialChar LyX
27122 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27123 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27132 \begin_layout Standard
27133 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27136 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27138 \begin_inset space ~
27146 arg "layout-paragraph"
27150 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27153 \begin_layout Subsection
27154 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27156 \begin_inset Index idx
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 Bibliography ! Databases
27166 \begin_inset Index idx
27169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27170 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27179 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27186 \begin_layout Standard
27187 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27193 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27195 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27196 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27201 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27203 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27204 your working field in a database.
27205 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27206 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27207 list for that document.
27208 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27212 \begin_layout Standard
27213 The database is a text file with the file extension
27214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27225 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27226 The format is explained in
27227 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27233 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27237 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27242 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27243 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27244 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27246 \begin_inset Flex URL
27249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27251 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 To use a database, use the menu
27262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27267 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27269 \begin_inset space ~
27275 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27276 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27283 Add bibliography to TOC
27285 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27290 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27291 in the document or just the cited references.
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27307 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27308 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27309 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27310 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27312 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27319 \begin_inset Newline newline
27323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27325 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27337 \begin_layout Standard
27338 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27341 \begin_layout Standard
27342 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27343 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27345 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27358 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27359 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27360 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27364 The following variants are possible:
27367 \begin_layout Description
27368 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27369 with other bibliography packages (e.
27370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27374 \begin_inset space \space{}
27381 ), only with the package
27385 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27389 \begin_layout Description
27390 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27391 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27392 with all bibliography packages, except
27397 \begin_layout Description
27398 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27403 , works with all bibliography packages
27406 \begin_layout Standard
27407 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27408 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27410 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27413 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27417 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27426 \begin_layout Standard
27427 When you select the option
27429 Sectioned bibliography
27433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27434 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27437 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27438 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27440 Customizing Bibliographies
27444 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27449 Additional Features
27454 \begin_layout Standard
27455 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27456 the two methods of creating them.
27457 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27458 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27459 We used the style file
27463 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27466 \begin_layout Subsection
27468 \begin_inset Index idx
27471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27472 Bibliography ! Citation format
27480 \begin_layout Standard
27481 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27482 For this feature you need to enable the option
27488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27492 \begin_inset Index idx
27495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27496 Document ! Settings
27506 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27507 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27508 style files as explained in
27509 the previous section.
27512 \begin_layout Standard
27513 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27514 the citation reference window.
27515 Here is an example where the text
27516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27520 \begin_inset space ~
27524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27527 appears after the reference:
27530 \begin_layout Standard
27532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27535 key "latexcompanion"
27542 \begin_layout Section
27544 \begin_inset Index idx
27547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27566 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27568 \begin_inset space ~
27573 or the toolbar button
27580 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27581 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27582 by \SpecialChar LyX
27583 as the index entry.
27586 \begin_layout Standard
27587 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27590 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27592 \begin_inset space ~
27598 A light blue box labeled
27599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27610 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27611 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27615 \begin_layout Standard
27616 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27617 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27618 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27619 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27623 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27630 \begin_layout Subsection
27631 Grouping Index Entries
27632 \begin_inset Index idx
27635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27644 \begin_layout Standard
27645 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27647 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27648 lists under the entry
27649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27657 First we create the entry
27658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27666 \begin_inset space ~
27670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27672 reference "subsec:Lists"
27677 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27678 \begin_inset space ~
27682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27684 reference "sec:Itemize"
27688 , we insert the command
27691 \begin_layout Standard
27697 \begin_layout Standard
27701 \begin_layout Standard
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27708 for the enumerated list in section
27709 \begin_inset space ~
27713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27715 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27723 The exclamation mark
27724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27731 marks the grouping levels.
27732 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27733 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27734 If we don't have an index entry for
27735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27742 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27745 \begin_layout Subsection
27747 \begin_inset Index idx
27750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 Index ! Page ranges
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27762 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27763 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27764 an index entry in section
27765 \begin_inset space ~
27769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27771 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27781 Paragraph environments|(
27784 \begin_layout Standard
27785 and another entry at the end of section
27786 \begin_inset space ~
27790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27792 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27799 \begin_layout Standard
27802 Paragraph environments|)
27805 \begin_layout Standard
27807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27830 respectively start and end the index range.
27831 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27832 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27833 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27834 An example is the index entry
27835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27838 Document ! Settings
27839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27845 \begin_layout Subsection
27847 \begin_inset Index idx
27850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 Index ! Cross referencing
27859 \begin_layout Standard
27860 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27861 We referred for example in the index entry
27862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27870 \begin_inset space ~
27874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27876 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
27880 ) to the index entry
27881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27888 in the same section using the entry
27891 \begin_layout Standard
27894 GIF|see{Image formats}
27897 \begin_layout Standard
27898 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
27900 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27901 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27904 \begin_layout Subsection
27906 \begin_inset Index idx
27909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27910 Index ! Entry order
27918 \begin_layout Standard
27919 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27920 follow the rules for the index order.
27921 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
27926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27935 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
27944 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27945 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27970 \begin_inset Index idx
27973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27974 Dummy entries ! maïs
27980 \begin_inset Index idx
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27984 Dummy entries ! maître
27990 \begin_inset Index idx
27993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27994 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27999 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28000 maïs, maison, maître.
28001 To achieve this, we use the command
28004 \begin_layout Standard
28007 previous entry@current entry
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 In our case we want to have
28012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28027 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28030 \begin_layout Standard
28036 \begin_layout Standard
28037 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28038 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28040 See the next subsection for an example.
28043 \begin_layout Standard
28044 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28050 \begin_layout Standard
28051 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28056 to generate the index (see sec.
28057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28063 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28072 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28073 -package aeguill in sec.
28074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28080 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28084 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28085 -packages although all these index
28086 commands start with
28087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28100 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28105 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28132 \begin_layout Subsection
28134 \begin_inset Index idx
28137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28138 Index ! Entry layout
28146 \begin_layout Standard
28147 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28148 \begin_inset Index idx
28151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 This is an italic dummy entry
28159 You can also format the page number using the character
28160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28167 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28168 -command without a backslash.
28169 We can write for example
28172 \begin_layout Standard
28175 italic page number:|textit
28178 \begin_layout Standard
28179 to get the page number in italic.
28180 \begin_inset Index idx
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28189 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28190 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28208 \begin_inset space ~
28214 Have a look at section
28215 \begin_inset space ~
28219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28221 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28225 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28229 \begin_layout Standard
28230 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28238 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28242 to generate the index, see sec.
28243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28249 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28258 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28263 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28264 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28267 key "latexcompanion"
28279 \begin_layout Standard
28280 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28282 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28283 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28284 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28285 If so, put the following in the preamble
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28304 \begin_layout Standard
28310 \begin_layout Standard
28311 in the index entry.
28312 \begin_inset Index idx
28315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28316 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28321 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28322 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28323 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28326 \begin_layout Standard
28327 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28328 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28329 a bold font for all index entries.
28330 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28342 documentation for details,
28343 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28345 key "makeindex,xindy"
28352 \begin_layout Subsection
28354 \begin_inset Index idx
28357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28366 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28373 \begin_layout Standard
28374 If the index generation program
28378 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28379 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28383 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28384 distribution, is used.
28388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28393 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28394 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28395 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28396 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28397 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28407 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28409 dialog, see section
28410 \begin_inset space ~
28414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28416 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28421 The available options are listed and explained in
28422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28424 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28429 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28434 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28435 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28438 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28439 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28443 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28444 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28447 \begin_layout Subsection
28451 \begin_layout Standard
28452 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28453 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28461 next to the standard index.
28463 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28464 that add this feature.
28471 \begin_inset Index idx
28474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28476 -packages ! splitidx
28481 package to generate multiple indexes.
28482 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28488 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28490 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28497 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28498 style, but it also includes
28499 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28500 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28508 \begin_layout Standard
28509 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28510 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28513 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28516 and select the option
28518 Use multiple Indexes
28525 already contains the standard index
28526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28534 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28535 also appear as a heading) to the
28539 input field and press the
28544 The new index now also appears in the list.
28545 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28546 label color to the new index.
28549 \begin_layout Standard
28550 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28553 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28560 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28561 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28562 are additional features:
28565 \begin_layout Itemize
28566 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28567 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28570 \begin_layout Itemize
28571 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28572 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28580 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28581 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28582 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28583 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28586 \begin_layout Section
28587 Nomenclature/Glossary
28588 \begin_inset Index idx
28591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28598 \begin_inset Index idx
28601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28632 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28639 \begin_layout Standard
28640 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28641 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28642 called nomenclature or glossary.
28645 \begin_layout Standard
28646 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28653 \begin_inset Index idx
28656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28658 -packages ! nomencl
28664 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28666 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28672 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28676 \begin_layout Standard
28677 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28678 and then use the menu
28680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28686 \begin_inset space ~
28691 or the toolbar button
28694 arg "nomencl-insert"
28699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28710 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28713 \begin_layout Standard
28714 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28715 The first is the term or
28719 that you wish to define.
28724 of the term or symbol.
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28728 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28737 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28745 \begin_layout Subsection
28746 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28747 \begin_inset Index idx
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28751 Nomenclature ! Layout
28759 \begin_layout Standard
28760 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28764 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28771 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28779 \begin_inset Newline newline
28787 \begin_inset Newline newline
28793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28800 character starts/ends the formula.
28801 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28802 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28814 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28824 \begin_layout Standard
28825 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28826 -syntax is given in section
28827 \begin_inset space ~
28831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28833 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28840 \begin_layout Standard
28844 \begin_inset space ~
28849 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28851 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28856 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28863 in this document is:
28864 \begin_inset Newline newline
28869 dummy entry for the character
28874 \begin_inset Newline newline
28886 \begin_inset space ~
28896 font use the command
28925 \begin_layout Standard
28926 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
28927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28931 \begin_inset space \space{}
28935 \begin_inset Newline newline
28951 \begin_inset Newline newline
28954 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
28955 This command will make the font of all symbols
28962 \begin_inset space ~
28970 \begin_layout Standard
28971 If the characters |
28972 \begin_inset space \space{}
28976 \begin_inset space \space{}
28980 \begin_inset space \space{}
28984 \begin_inset space \space{}
28988 \begin_inset space \space{}
28991 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28992 a quote character in front of them.
28993 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28994 LatexCommand nomenclature
28995 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28996 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29003 \begin_layout Subsection
29004 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29005 \begin_inset Index idx
29008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29009 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29017 \begin_layout Standard
29018 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29019 -code of the symbol
29021 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29023 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29026 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29027 LatexCommand nomenclature
29029 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29036 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29040 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29041 LatexCommand nomenclature
29044 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29049 They will be sorted by
29050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29076 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29079 will be sorted before the
29083 since the character
29084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29091 is considered in sorting.
29094 \begin_layout Standard
29095 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29098 \begin_inset space ~
29103 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29104 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29106 For the example given, you can insert
29110 in this field for the
29111 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29118 will be located before
29119 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29125 \begin_layout Standard
29126 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29131 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29140 \begin_layout Subsection
29141 Nomenclature Options
29142 \begin_inset Index idx
29145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29146 Nomenclature ! Options
29154 \begin_layout Standard
29159 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29160 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29163 \begin_layout Description
29164 refeq Appends the phrase
29165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29180 to every nomenclature entry, where
29186 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29189 \begin_layout Description
29190 refpage Appends the phrase
29191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29206 to every nomenclature entry, where
29212 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29215 \begin_layout Description
29216 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29220 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29221 class options list in the
29223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29227 In this document the options
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29235 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29241 \begin_layout Standard
29242 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29243 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29248 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29251 \begin_layout Description
29261 \begin_layout Description
29264 nomrefpage Like the
29271 \begin_layout Description
29274 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29283 \begin_layout Description
29287 \begin_inset space ~
29293 \begin_inset space ~
29298 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29301 \begin_layout Standard
29303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29310 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29311 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29315 \begin_layout Standard
29323 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29326 \begin_inset Newline newline
29333 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29338 \begin_inset Newline newline
29342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29357 by their translation.
29360 \begin_layout Subsection
29361 Printing the Nomenclature
29362 \begin_inset Index idx
29365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29366 Nomenclature ! Printing
29374 \begin_layout Standard
29375 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29378 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29394 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29395 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29396 You can choose between these settings:
29399 \begin_layout Description
29400 Default a space of 1
29401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29407 \begin_layout Description
29409 \begin_inset space ~
29413 \begin_inset space ~
29416 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29419 \begin_layout Description
29420 Custom custom space
29423 \begin_layout Standard
29424 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29433 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29441 For example, in order to change the name to
29445 , add the following line to the preamble:
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29456 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29459 \begin_layout Subsection
29460 Nomenclature Program
29461 \begin_inset Index idx
29464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29465 Nomenclature ! Program
29471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29473 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29480 \begin_layout Standard
29486 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29487 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29489 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29494 by adding options, see section
29495 \begin_inset space ~
29499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29501 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29506 The available options are listed and explained in
29507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29509 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29516 \begin_layout Section
29518 \begin_inset Index idx
29521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29528 \begin_inset Index idx
29531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29532 Document ! Branches
29538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29540 name "sec:Branches"
29547 \begin_layout Standard
29548 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29549 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29550 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29551 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29556 allows you to put text into branches.
29557 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29558 To create a branch, either select the menu
29560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29561 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29564 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29566 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29573 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29574 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29575 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29576 and whether the name of the branch should
29577 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29578 (see below for an example).
29579 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29580 to the name of the other) and to add
29581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29589 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29593 \begin_inset space ~
29596 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29597 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29600 \begin_layout Standard
29601 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29602 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29607 where you can choose a branch.
29608 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29612 \begin_layout Standard
29613 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29614 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29617 \begin_layout Standard
29618 \begin_inset Branch Question
29621 \begin_layout Standard
29622 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29630 \begin_layout Standard
29631 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29643 \begin_layout Standard
29650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29651 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29654 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29655 Consider for example a file
29656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29663 which has the above branches.
29665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29672 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29696 branch were inactive,
29697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29712 branch was active, likewise
29713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29728 branch was active, and
29729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29732 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29736 if both branches were active.
29737 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29740 \begin_layout Standard
29741 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29747 \begin_layout Standard
29748 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29749 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29750 definitions for each branch.
29751 For example you can define for the question branch
29755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29756 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29757 -syntax, see section
29758 \begin_inset space ~
29762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29764 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29776 \begin_layout Standard
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29796 \begin_layout Standard
29797 and for the answer branch
29800 \begin_layout Standard
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29821 \begin_inset Branch Question
29824 \begin_layout Standard
29828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29856 \begin_layout Standard
29857 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29860 \begin_layout Standard
29864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29892 \begin_layout Standard
29893 Now it is possible to use the
29897 question{\SpecialChar ldots
29904 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
29907 commands to obtain conditional output.
29908 Here is an example formula where only the
29915 \begin_inset Formula
29917 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29925 \begin_layout Standard
29926 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29934 \begin_layout Standard
29935 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29941 \begin_inset space \space{}
29944 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
29946 For this advanced usage, see the
29951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29954 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29961 \begin_layout Section
29963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29965 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29970 \begin_inset Index idx
29973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29982 \begin_layout Standard
29985 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29986 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29989 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29991 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29997 \begin_inset Index idx
30000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30002 -packages ! hyperref
30007 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30008 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30009 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30010 part of the document.
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30015 The header information in the dialog tab
30019 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30020 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30021 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30022 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30026 \begin_inset space ~
30030 \begin_inset space ~
30035 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30036 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30037 and author entries.
30041 \begin_inset space ~
30045 \begin_inset space ~
30049 \begin_inset space ~
30054 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30057 \begin_layout Standard
30058 You can specify in the dialog tab
30062 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30067 \begin_inset space ~
30071 \begin_inset space ~
30075 \begin_inset space ~
30080 option allows long links to be split;
30083 \begin_inset space ~
30087 \begin_inset space ~
30091 \begin_inset space ~
30099 \begin_inset space ~
30104 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30107 \begin_inset space ~
30112 colors the different links.
30113 The default colors are:
30116 \begin_layout Labeling
30117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30122 for hyperlinks and URLs
30125 \begin_layout Labeling
30126 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30134 \begin_layout Labeling
30135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30144 but you can change these in the field
30149 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30152 \begin_layout Standard
30155 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30163 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30164 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30165 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30168 \begin_layout Standard
30173 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30174 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30175 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30185 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30186 when opening the PDF.
30188 \begin_inset space ~
30191 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30192 \begin_inset space ~
30195 1 will only display the sections.
30198 \begin_layout Standard
30199 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30200 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30206 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30207 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30216 \begin_layout Section
30218 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30222 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30229 \begin_layout Subsection
30232 \begin_inset Index idx
30235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30245 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30253 As \SpecialChar LyX
30254 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30255 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30256 commands and constructs,
30259 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30260 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30261 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30262 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30263 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30264 cannot support all packages and
30268 \begin_layout Standard
30269 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30270 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30271 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30275 Code box is created by the menu
30277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30279 \begin_inset space ~
30284 or by the toolbar button
30297 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30305 \begin_layout Standard
30306 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30308 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30310 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30311 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30318 , you can write the command part
30324 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30325 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30329 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30330 Code box behind the word.
30331 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30332 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 \begin_inset Graphics
30338 filename clipart/ERT.png
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30350 \begin_layout Standard
30351 This is a line with a
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 \begin_layout Standard
30379 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30387 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30388 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30389 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30390 know that the command is finished.
30398 \begin_layout Subsection
30399 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30401 \begin_inset Argument 1
30404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30405 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30412 \begin_inset Index idx
30415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30425 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30433 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30434 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30435 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30436 uses in the background.
30437 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30438 is based on commands, you can
30439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30447 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30448 any time if you know the right commands.
30449 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30450 is the end of the day.
30451 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30452 all caption labels bold.
30453 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30455 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30460 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30462 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30464 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30467 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 As result you find that the package
30482 \begin_inset Index idx
30485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30487 -packages ! caption
30493 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30498 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30510 \begin_layout Standard
30515 usepackage[options]{package name}
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30519 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30520 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30521 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30522 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30525 \begin_layout Standard
30526 In your case the package name is
30531 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30536 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30537 So you add the command
30540 \begin_layout Standard
30545 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30549 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 For more commands provided by the
30558 package, have a look at its documentation,
30559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30573 \begin_layout Standard
30574 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30576 For example if you use a
30580 class, you don't need the package
30584 , you can instead write
30587 \begin_layout Standard
30592 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30597 \begin_layout Standard
30598 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30599 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30600 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30607 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30610 \begin_layout Standard
30611 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30612 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30614 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30615 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30616 Code box as described in the previous
30620 \begin_layout Standard
30621 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30622 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30625 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30627 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30634 \begin_layout Standard
30635 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30641 \begin_layout Standard
30645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30655 \begin_inset Note Note
30658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30667 \begin_layout Left Header
30668 \begin_inset Argument 1
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30691 \begin_inset Note Note
30694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30695 defines the header line as described below
30703 \begin_layout Center Header
30704 \begin_inset Argument 1
30707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30716 \begin_layout Right Header
30717 \begin_inset Argument 1
30720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 \begin_layout Left Footer
30742 \begin_inset Argument 1
30745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30766 \begin_layout Center Footer
30767 \begin_inset Argument 1
30770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30782 \begin_inset Newline newline
30786 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30792 \begin_layout Right Footer
30793 \begin_inset Argument 1
30796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30818 \begin_layout Section
30819 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30822 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30827 \begin_inset Index idx
30830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30831 Document ! Header/Footer line
30837 \begin_inset Index idx
30840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30849 \begin_layout Standard
30850 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30854 \begin_inset space ~
30865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30871 \begin_inset space ~
30877 As a second step add in the menu
30879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30880 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30887 Custom Header/Footerlines
30888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30892 This module offers the following 6
30893 \begin_inset space ~
30899 \begin_layout Description
30901 \begin_inset space ~
30905 \begin_inset space ~
30909 \begin_inset space ~
30913 \begin_inset space ~
30917 \begin_inset space ~
30923 \begin_layout Description
30925 \begin_inset space ~
30929 \begin_inset space ~
30933 \begin_inset space ~
30937 \begin_inset space ~
30941 \begin_inset space ~
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30951 \begin_layout Standard
30952 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30953 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30955 \begin_inset space ~
30959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30961 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30965 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30968 \begin_layout Standard
30969 \begin_inset Float figure
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 \begin_inset Tabular
30979 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30980 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30981 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30982 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30983 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30985 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31003 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31014 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31032 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31043 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31047 The normal text on the page goes here.
31048 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31050 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31051 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31056 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31065 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31076 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31094 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31123 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31141 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31146 name "fig:Page-layout"
31150 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31172 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31176 \begin_inset space ~
31181 is set to “Default”.
31182 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31191 \begin_layout Subsection
31195 \begin_layout Standard
31196 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31197 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31198 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31199 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31201 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31202 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31205 \begin_layout Standard
31206 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31207 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31213 \begin_inset space ~
31221 \begin_layout Description
31224 thepage prints the current page number
31227 \begin_layout Description
31230 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31233 \begin_layout Description
31236 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31239 \begin_layout Description
31242 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31243 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31250 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31253 because it usually goes in a left header.
31256 \begin_layout Description
31259 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31260 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31262 It is normally used in the right header.
31265 \begin_layout Subsection
31266 Default header/footer
31269 \begin_layout Standard
31270 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31271 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31272 footer has the page number.
31273 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31274 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31275 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31278 \begin_inset space ~
31286 \begin_layout Subsection
31290 \begin_layout Standard
31291 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31292 Some pages are different.
31293 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31294 a new part or chapter in your book.
31295 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31296 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31297 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31301 Header and footer decoration line
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31305 By default, you get a 0.4
31306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31309 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31310 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31322 in the following way:
31325 \begin_layout Standard
31332 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31335 \begin_layout Standard
31336 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31345 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31352 \begin_layout Standard
31353 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31355 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31356 \begin_inset space ~
31360 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31369 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31370 Several header/footer lines
31373 \begin_layout Standard
31374 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31375 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31376 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31378 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31407 \begin_inset space ~
31415 \begin_layout Standard
31422 headheight}{height}
31425 \begin_layout Standard
31426 where height is a size in standard units.
31427 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31428 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31429 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31430 logfile with the menu
31432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31438 \begin_inset space ~
31443 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31448 \begin_inset Index idx
31451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31453 -packages ! fancyhdr
31459 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31460 for your header/footer.
31463 \begin_layout Subsection
31467 \begin_layout Standard
31468 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31469 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31470 This example consists of the following definition:
31473 \begin_layout Description
31475 \begin_inset space ~
31484 , empty optional argument
31487 \begin_layout Description
31489 \begin_inset space ~
31492 Header empty, empty optional argument
31495 \begin_layout Description
31497 \begin_inset space ~
31506 in the optional argument
31509 \begin_layout Description
31511 \begin_inset space ~
31520 in the optional argument
31523 \begin_layout Description
31525 \begin_inset space ~
31538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31542 \begin_inset Newline newline
31546 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31553 in the optional argument
31556 \begin_layout Description
31558 \begin_inset space ~
31567 , empty optional argument
31570 \begin_layout Description
31573 headrulewidth set to 2
31574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31581 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31582 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31597 \begin_layout Standard
31598 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31604 \begin_layout Standard
31608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31612 pagestyle{headings}
31618 \begin_inset Note Note
31621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31622 switches back to page style with the default headings
31630 \begin_layout Section
31631 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31634 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31639 \begin_inset Index idx
31642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31649 \begin_inset Index idx
31652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 \begin_layout Standard
31663 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31664 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31665 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31668 \begin_layout Subsection
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31673 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31679 \begin_inset Index idx
31682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31684 -packages ! preview-latex
31689 (on some systems named simply
31694 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31702 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31704 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31712 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31713 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31714 -package are automatically
31715 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31719 \begin_layout Subsection
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31724 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31725 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31727 activate the option
31730 \begin_inset space ~
31737 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31743 \begin_inset space ~
31747 \begin_inset space ~
31750 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31757 \begin_inset space ~
31770 \begin_inset space ~
31775 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31779 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31784 \begin_inset space ~
31792 \begin_inset space ~
31800 \begin_layout Standard
31801 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31802 and when you finish
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31816 generated by activating the option
31819 \begin_inset space ~
31825 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31833 \begin_layout Subsection
31834 Selected document parts
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31839 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
31840 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
31841 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31843 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31849 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31850 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31851 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31854 \begin_layout Standard
31855 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31862 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
31867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31874 is explained in section
31876 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31881 \begin_inset space ~
31891 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
31892 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31893 the final rotated boxes,
31894 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
31895 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31897 Here is the result:
31900 \begin_layout Standard
31901 \begin_inset Preview
31903 \begin_layout Standard
31908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31912 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31918 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31928 height_special "totalheight"
31933 backgroundcolor "none"
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31961 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31967 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31989 \begin_layout Standard
31990 Previewing works also for colors.
31991 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32010 is explained in section
32017 \begin_inset space ~
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32031 \begin_inset Preview
32033 \begin_layout Standard
32037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32056 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32061 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32080 \begin_layout Standard
32081 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32087 \begin_layout Standard
32088 If \SpecialChar LyX
32089 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32090 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32091 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32092 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32093 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32094 the \SpecialChar TeX
32096 If \SpecialChar LyX
32097 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32098 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32100 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32101 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32102 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32105 \begin_layout Subsection
32110 \begin_layout Standard
32111 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32112 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32115 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32117 \begin_inset space ~
32122 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32124 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32126 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32127 's main window, then only this selection
32128 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32129 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32130 the source view window.
32135 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32136 ; but note that if you have
32137 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32139 not just the one which is open at the time.
32142 \begin_layout Section
32143 Advanced Find and Replace
32144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32146 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32151 \begin_inset Index idx
32154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32161 \begin_inset Index idx
32164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 \begin_layout Subsection
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32178 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32179 allows for searching of complex,
32180 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32182 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32183 The key-features are:
32186 \begin_layout Itemize
32187 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32188 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32189 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32193 \begin_layout Itemize
32194 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32195 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32196 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32197 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32200 \begin_layout Itemize
32201 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32202 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32203 outside of mathematics environments
32206 \begin_layout Itemize
32207 Search may be widened to a specific
32212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32216 \begin_inset space ~
32219 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32220 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32227 \begin_layout Itemize
32228 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32229 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32234 \begin_inset space ~
32237 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32240 \begin_layout Subsection
32244 \begin_layout Standard
32245 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32247 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32260 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32263 ) or the toolbar button
32266 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32272 Advanced Find and Replace
32277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32281 \begin_layout Standard
32287 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32291 \begin_inset space ~
32296 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32299 arg "paragraph-break"
32303 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32304 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32308 arg "paragraph-break"
32311 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32315 searches backwards.
32318 \begin_layout Standard
32322 \begin_inset space ~
32327 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32336 \begin_inset space ~
32341 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32345 Searching for mathematics
32348 \begin_layout Standard
32349 Mathematical formulas, such as
32350 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32353 or something more complex like
32354 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32357 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32362 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32363 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32364 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32365 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32375 \begin_layout Standard
32376 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32377 This is done by switching to the
32381 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32386 This way, entering in the
32393 \begin_layout Itemize
32394 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32395 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32398 \begin_layout Itemize
32399 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32400 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32403 \begin_layout Itemize
32404 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32405 of it only within section headings.
32406 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32407 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32411 \begin_layout Itemize
32412 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32413 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 The entries made in the
32425 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32428 \begin_inset space ~
32434 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32438 button or alternatively press
32441 arg "paragraph-break"
32448 while the cursor is in the
32451 \begin_inset space ~
32459 \begin_layout Standard
32460 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32462 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32466 \begin_layout Itemize
32467 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32468 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32476 with its typewriter version
32477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32491 \begin_layout Itemize
32492 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32498 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32510 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32517 (you may want to enable the
32520 \begin_inset space ~
32528 \begin_inset space ~
32533 options and disable the
32541 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32549 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32550 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32554 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32557 , or occurrences of
32558 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32562 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32568 \begin_layout Subsection
32572 \begin_layout Standard
32573 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32578 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32580 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32582 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32591 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32597 This is done with the context menu
32599 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32600 Insert Regular Expression
32602 while the cursor is in the
32607 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32608 expression matching rules
32612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32613 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32620 \begin_inset space ~
32623 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32624 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32630 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32631 same text in the document.
32632 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32633 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32636 \begin_layout Enumerate
32637 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32642 editor the fraction
32643 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32647 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32650 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32651 fractions with the given denominator.
32654 \begin_layout Enumerate
32655 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32667 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32672 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32673 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32674 Also, by inserting a
32675 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32678 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32679 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32682 \begin_layout Standard
32683 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32684 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32685 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32688 , and referring back to them through
32689 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32693 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32697 For example, try searching with the regexp
32698 \begin_inset Newline newline
32701 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32704 \begin_inset Newline newline
32707 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32710 \begin_layout Standard
32711 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32714 \begin_layout Standard
32715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32723 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32724 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32725 sub-expressions is absolute.
32727 \begin_inset space ~
32731 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32734 always refers to the first occurrence of
32735 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32738 in all entered regexps.
32746 \begin_layout Section
32748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32750 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32755 \begin_inset Index idx
32758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32769 has a built-in spell checker.
32772 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32779 key or the toolbar button
32782 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32785 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32786 beginning of the currently selected text.
32787 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32788 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32789 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32790 scrolled so that it is visible.
32791 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32792 n, if any could be found.
32793 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32797 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32798 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32801 \begin_layout Standard
32802 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32809 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32810 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32812 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32813 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32816 \begin_inset space ~
32824 arg "dialog-show character"
32827 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32829 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32833 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32834 can be downloaded from here:
32835 \begin_inset Newline newline
32839 \begin_inset Flex URL
32842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32844 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32850 \begin_inset Newline newline
32854 \begin_inset space ~
32857 files for each language.
32858 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32859 \begin_inset space ~
32862 files into \SpecialChar LyX
32863 's installation subfolder
32871 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
32873 \begin_inset Newline newline
32876 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32877 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32878 but in most cases these are
32894 is the language code.
32897 \begin_layout Subsection
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32904 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32905 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32907 \begin_inset space ~
32910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32913 you can set the following things:
32916 \begin_layout Description
32918 \begin_inset space ~
32921 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
32922 should use for spell checking.
32923 Depending on your platform,
32937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32938 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32939 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32954 \begin_inset space ~
32957 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
32960 \begin_layout Description
32962 \begin_inset space ~
32965 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
32966 will always use the given language
32967 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32970 \begin_layout Description
32972 \begin_inset space ~
32975 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32981 \begin_inset space \space{}
32985 This should normally not be needed.
32988 \begin_layout Description
32990 \begin_inset space ~
32994 \begin_inset space ~
32997 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33009 \begin_layout Description
33011 \begin_inset space ~
33014 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33015 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33016 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33017 appear in a context menu.
33018 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33022 \begin_layout Description
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33028 \begin_inset space ~
33032 \begin_inset space ~
33035 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33039 \begin_layout Section
33041 \begin_inset Index idx
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33053 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33060 \begin_layout Standard
33062 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33063 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33073 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33075 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33084 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33086 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33087 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33088 which are available for many languages.
33091 \begin_layout Standard
33092 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33093 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33097 \begin_layout Subsection
33098 Setting up the thesaurus
33101 \begin_layout Standard
33110 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33114 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33119 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33125 \begin_inset space ~
33133 For instance, the US English files are named:
33136 \begin_layout Itemize
33140 \begin_layout Itemize
33144 \begin_layout Standard
33153 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33154 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33157 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33158 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33159 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33161 \begin_inset space ~
33166 ) to the path where they are installed.
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33172 ies, typical locations are
33178 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33182 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33186 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33189 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33195 LibreOffice-<Version>
33202 On the Mac, the default location is
33204 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33205 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33206 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33207 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33208 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33209 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33217 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33218 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33219 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33223 \begin_layout Standard
33224 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33225 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33229 \begin_layout Itemize
33230 \begin_inset Flex URL
33233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33235 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33243 \begin_layout Standard
33244 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33245 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33247 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33248 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33249 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33251 \begin_inset space ~
33256 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33258 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33259 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33263 \begin_layout Standard
33264 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33266 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33269 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33275 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33278 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33279 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33288 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33289 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33291 \begin_inset space ~
33296 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33299 \begin_layout Subsection
33300 Using the thesaurus
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33304 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33306 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33309 or the toolbar button
33312 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33315 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33317 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33319 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33320 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33321 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33330 ), related terms (such as
33333 \begin_inset space ~
33342 ), compounds (such as
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33354 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33363 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33367 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33368 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33372 \begin_layout Standard
33373 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33374 the dictionary, such as the above
33378 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33383 \begin_inset space \space{}
33386 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33387 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33388 For example, looking up the word form
33392 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33397 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33402 \begin_inset space \space{}
33413 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33414 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33415 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33418 \begin_layout Section
33420 \begin_inset Index idx
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33430 \begin_inset Index idx
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33434 Document ! Change Tracking
33440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33442 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33449 \begin_layout Standard
33450 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33451 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33452 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33453 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33455 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33457 \begin_inset space ~
33460 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33462 \begin_inset space ~
33470 \begin_layout Standard
33471 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33485 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33486 You can change the color in
33488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33489 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33491 \begin_inset space ~
33495 \begin_inset space ~
33500 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33506 \begin_inset Index idx
33509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33510 Color ! Change tracking
33515 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33516 's status bar when the
33517 cursor is in changed text.
33518 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33521 arg "changes-merge"
33527 \begin_layout Standard
33528 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33530 \begin_inset Index idx
33533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33542 \begin_layout Standard
33543 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33549 \begin_layout Standard
33550 \begin_inset Graphics
33551 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33560 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33566 \begin_layout Standard
33567 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33570 \begin_layout Standard
33571 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33577 \begin_layout Standard
33578 \begin_inset Tabular
33579 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33580 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33581 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33592 arg "changes-track"
33600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33606 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33608 \begin_inset space ~
33611 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33613 \begin_inset space ~
33622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33631 arg "changes-output"
33639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33645 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33647 \begin_inset space ~
33650 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33652 \begin_inset space ~
33656 \begin_inset space ~
33660 \begin_inset space ~
33669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33690 Jumps to the next change
33696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33705 arg "change-accept"
33713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33721 \begin_inset space ~
33724 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33726 \begin_inset space ~
33735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33744 arg "change-reject"
33752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33760 \begin_inset space ~
33763 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33765 \begin_inset space ~
33774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33783 arg "changes-merge"
33791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33802 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33804 \begin_inset space ~
33813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 arg "all-changes-accept"
33830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33841 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33843 \begin_inset space ~
33847 \begin_inset space ~
33856 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33865 arg "all-changes-reject"
33873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33881 \begin_inset space ~
33884 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33886 \begin_inset space ~
33890 \begin_inset space ~
33899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33923 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33957 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33959 \begin_inset space ~
33975 \begin_layout Standard
33976 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33982 \begin_layout Standard
33983 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34003 \begin_layout Standard
34004 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34005 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34006 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34007 the next change after the current cursor position.
34008 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34009 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34010 step to the next change.
34011 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34014 \begin_layout Standard
34015 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34016 to describe a change.
34019 \begin_layout Standard
34020 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34026 \begin_inset Index idx
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34031 -packages ! dvipost
34037 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34045 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34049 \begin_layout Section
34050 Comparison of Documents
34051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34053 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34058 \begin_inset Index idx
34061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34062 Comparison of documents
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34071 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34074 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34078 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34079 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34081 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34083 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34091 \begin_inset space ~
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34104 \begin_inset space ~
34108 \begin_inset space ~
34112 \begin_inset space ~
34116 \begin_inset space ~
34120 \begin_inset space ~
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34129 enables the change tracking option
34132 \begin_inset space ~
34136 \begin_inset space ~
34140 \begin_inset space ~
34145 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34148 \begin_layout Section
34149 International Support
34150 \begin_inset Index idx
34153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34154 International support
34162 \begin_layout Standard
34163 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34164 with any language you want.
34165 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34166 up \SpecialChar LyX
34168 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34170 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34177 \begin_layout Standard
34178 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34179 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34180 \begin_inset space ~
34184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34186 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34193 \begin_layout Subsection
34195 \begin_inset Index idx
34198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34205 \begin_inset Index idx
34208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34209 Document ! Settings
34215 \begin_inset Index idx
34218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34219 Document ! Language
34227 \begin_layout Standard
34230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34231 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34234 dialog lets you set
34236 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34241 \begin_layout Standard
34246 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34251 \begin_inset space ~
34256 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34257 For details about the different encoding options see section
34258 \begin_inset space ~
34262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34264 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34271 \begin_layout Subsection
34272 Keyboard mapping configuration
34273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34275 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34282 \begin_layout Standard
34283 If you have for example a U.
34284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34287 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34288 can use an alternate keymap.
34289 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34295 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34296 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34299 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34300 \begin_inset space ~
34304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34306 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34311 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34312 which one you want to use.
34315 \begin_layout Standard
34316 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34317 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34318 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34322 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34323 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34324 one to support the characters you want.
34325 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34332 \begin_layout Chapter
34335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34337 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34345 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34346 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34347 topic inside the user's guide.
34350 \begin_layout Section
34352 \begin_inset Index idx
34355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34364 \begin_layout Standard
34369 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34372 \begin_layout Subsection
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34377 Creates a new document.
34380 \begin_layout Subsection
34384 \begin_layout Standard
34385 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34386 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34387 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34390 \begin_layout Subsection
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34398 \begin_layout Subsection
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34403 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34404 Click there on a file to open it.
34407 \begin_layout Subsection
34411 \begin_layout Standard
34412 Closes the current document.
34415 \begin_layout Subsection
34419 \begin_layout Standard
34420 Closes all opened documents.
34423 \begin_layout Subsection
34427 \begin_layout Standard
34428 Saves the actual document.
34431 \begin_layout Subsection
34435 \begin_layout Standard
34436 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34439 \begin_layout Subsection
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 Saves all opened documents.
34447 \begin_layout Subsection
34451 \begin_layout Standard
34452 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34455 \begin_layout Subsection
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34461 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34462 It is described in the section
34464 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34469 Additional Features
34474 \begin_layout Subsection
34478 \begin_layout Standard
34479 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34480 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34482 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34483 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 When using the menu entry
34491 \begin_inset space ~
34496 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34500 \begin_inset space ~
34504 \begin_inset space ~
34508 \begin_inset space ~
34513 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34514 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34517 \begin_layout Subsection
34519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34521 name "subsec:Export"
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 You can export your document to various file formats.
34530 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34532 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34533 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34534 during its configuration.
34537 \begin_layout Standard
34538 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34540 \begin_inset space ~
34544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34546 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34553 \begin_layout Description
34559 \begin_inset space ~
34562 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34564 \begin_inset space ~
34567 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34568 \begin_inset Newline newline
34571 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34572 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34576 \begin_layout Description
34577 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34583 \begin_layout Description
34585 \begin_inset space ~
34588 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34594 \begin_layout Description
34595 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34596 's native DVI-format.
34597 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34598 files paths or file names in your document.
34600 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34607 \begin_layout Description
34608 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34609 in files paths or file names
34612 \begin_layout Description
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34621 ) DVI-format using the program
34623 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34626 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34630 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34638 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34646 \begin_layout Description
34648 \begin_inset space ~
34651 (cropped) the same as
34655 but with cropped page margins.
34658 \begin_layout Description
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34663 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34667 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34672 \begin_layout Description
34676 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34684 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34692 \begin_layout Description
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34698 \begin_inset space ~
34701 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34705 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34713 \begin_layout Description
34717 \begin_inset space ~
34726 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34727 source that is compilable with the program
34729 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34733 \begin_layout Description
34737 \begin_inset space ~
34742 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34743 source, additionally all images used in the document
34744 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34748 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34751 \begin_layout Description
34755 \begin_inset space ~
34760 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34761 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34762 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34770 \begin_layout Description
34774 \begin_inset space ~
34783 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34784 source that is compilable with the program
34790 \begin_layout Description
34792 \begin_inset space ~
34796 \begin_inset space ~
34803 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34804 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34810 \begin_layout Description
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34815 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34816 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34822 \begin_inset space \space{}
34827 \begin_inset space ~
34831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34846 represent the version number)
34849 \begin_layout Description
34851 \begin_inset space ~
34855 \begin_inset space ~
34858 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34859 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34860 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34864 \begin_layout Description
34865 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
34866 's internal XHTML engine
34869 \begin_layout Description
34870 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34875 \begin_layout Description
34876 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34878 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34881 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34885 \begin_layout Description
34887 \begin_inset space ~
34890 (cropped) the same as
34893 \begin_inset space ~
34898 but with cropped page margins
34901 \begin_layout Description
34905 \begin_inset space ~
34910 PDF-format using the program
34914 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34917 \begin_layout Description
34921 \begin_inset space ~
34925 \begin_inset space ~
34933 \begin_inset space ~
34938 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34943 \begin_inset space \space{}
34946 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34950 \begin_layout Description
34954 \begin_inset space ~
34959 PDF-format using the program
34961 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34964 , produces PDF-files directly
34967 \begin_layout Description
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34976 PDF-format using the program
34980 , produces PDF-files directly
34983 \begin_layout Description
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34992 PDF-format using the program
34996 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34999 \begin_layout Description
35003 \begin_inset space ~
35008 PDF-format using the program
35013 , produces PDF-files directly
35016 \begin_layout Description
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35028 \begin_layout Description
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35041 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35042 and then exported as text using the program
35047 \begin_layout Description
35052 PostScript format using the program
35057 \begin_layout Description
35058 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35059 source and also code in the statistical programming
35073 it is possible to use
35077 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35081 \begin_layout Standard
35082 If one of the menu entries
35089 \begin_inset space ~
35098 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35100 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35102 \begin_inset space ~
35106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35108 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35113 \begin_inset Index idx
35116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35117 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35126 \begin_layout Subsection
35130 \begin_layout Standard
35131 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35132 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35135 \begin_inset space ~
35139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35141 reference "sec:Paths"
35146 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35155 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35156 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35157 's preferences as described in section
35158 \begin_inset space ~
35162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35164 reference "subsec:Converters"
35171 \begin_layout Subsection
35172 New and Close Window
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35176 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35180 \begin_layout Subsection
35184 \begin_layout Standard
35185 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35188 \begin_layout Section
35190 \begin_inset Index idx
35193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35202 \begin_layout Subsection
35206 \begin_layout Standard
35207 Described in section
35208 \begin_inset space ~
35212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35214 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35221 \begin_layout Subsection
35222 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 Described in section
35227 \begin_inset space ~
35231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35233 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35240 \begin_layout Subsection
35244 \begin_layout Standard
35245 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35246 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35249 \begin_layout Subsection
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35254 Selects the whole document.
35257 \begin_layout Subsection
35258 Find & Replace (Quick)
35261 \begin_layout Standard
35262 Described in section
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35269 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35276 \begin_layout Subsection
35277 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35280 \begin_layout Standard
35281 Described in section
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35288 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35295 \begin_layout Subsection
35296 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35299 \begin_layout Standard
35300 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35304 \begin_layout Subsection
35308 \begin_layout Standard
35309 Described in section
35310 \begin_inset space ~
35314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35316 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35323 \begin_layout Subsection
35325 \begin_inset Index idx
35328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35329 Paragraph ! Settings
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35339 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35343 \begin_layout Standard
35344 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35345 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35354 \begin_inset space ~
35362 \begin_layout Subsection
35366 \begin_layout Standard
35367 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35368 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35369 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35373 \begin_layout Standard
35374 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35376 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35377 The properties of tables are described in section
35378 \begin_inset space ~
35382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35384 reference "sec:Tables"
35388 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35389 \begin_inset space ~
35393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35395 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35402 \begin_layout Subsection
35403 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35406 \begin_layout Standard
35407 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35409 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35410 \begin_inset space ~
35414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35416 reference "sec:Nesting"
35421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35423 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35430 \begin_layout Subsection
35433 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35436 \begin_layout Standard
35437 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35438 nts of the same type.
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35446 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35450 for an explanation.
35453 \begin_layout Section
35455 \begin_inset Index idx
35458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35467 \begin_layout Standard
35468 At the bottom of the
35472 menu the opened documents are listed.
35475 \begin_layout Subsection
35476 Open/Close all Insets
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35480 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35483 \begin_layout Subsection
35484 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35487 \begin_layout Standard
35488 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35491 \begin_layout Standard
35492 Math macros are described in the
35499 \begin_layout Subsection
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35504 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35505 \begin_inset space ~
35509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35511 reference "sec:Navigating"
35516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35518 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35525 \begin_layout Subsection
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35530 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35532 \begin_inset space ~
35536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35538 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35545 \begin_layout Subsection
35549 \begin_layout Standard
35550 Opens a window showing console messages.
35551 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35556 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35557 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35558 is processing the document.
35561 \begin_layout Subsection
35563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35565 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35570 \begin_inset Index idx
35573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35584 All toolbars and the
35587 \begin_inset space ~
35592 can be turned on and off.
35597 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35609 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35626 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35630 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35637 \begin_layout Standard
35642 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35646 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35647 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35648 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35649 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35650 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35653 \begin_layout Standard
35655 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35656 \begin_inset space ~
35660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35662 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35669 \begin_layout Subsection
35673 \begin_layout Standard
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset space ~
35697 \begin_inset space ~
35702 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35703 's main window vertically while
35706 \begin_inset space ~
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35714 \begin_inset space ~
35718 \begin_inset space ~
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35726 \begin_inset space ~
35731 will split it horizontally.
35732 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35733 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35734 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35735 three or more documents at the same time.
35736 To close a split view, use the menu
35739 \begin_inset space ~
35743 \begin_inset space ~
35751 \begin_layout Subsection
35755 \begin_layout Standard
35756 Closes a split view.
35759 \begin_layout Subsection
35763 \begin_layout Standard
35764 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35765 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35766 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
35767 's main window fullscreen.
35768 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35769 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35772 \begin_layout Section
35774 \begin_inset Index idx
35777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35786 \begin_layout Subsection
35790 \begin_layout Standard
35791 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35792 \begin_inset space ~
35796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35798 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35809 \begin_layout Subsection
35811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35813 name "subsec:Special-Character"
35820 \begin_layout Standard
35821 Here you can insert the following characters:
35824 \begin_layout Description
35829 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35832 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35833 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35834 -packages you have installed.
35835 You can get a complete display by checking
35838 \begin_inset space ~
35844 \begin_inset Newline newline
35848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35856 Not all characters will be visible in the
35860 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35868 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
35872 ) can display every character.
35880 \begin_layout Description
35881 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
35885 \begin_layout Description
35887 \begin_inset space ~
35891 \begin_inset space ~
35894 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35895 \begin_inset space ~
35899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35901 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
35908 \begin_layout Description
35910 \begin_inset space ~
35913 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35917 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35923 \begin_layout Description
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35928 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35938 \begin_layout Description
35940 \begin_inset space ~
35943 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
35947 \begin_layout Description
35949 \begin_inset space ~
35952 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
35956 \begin_layout Description
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35961 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35967 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35973 \begin_layout Description
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35978 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
35982 \begin_layout Description
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35988 \begin_inset Index idx
35991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35998 \begin_inset Index idx
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36007 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36008 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36010 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36016 \begin_inset Index idx
36019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36027 \begin_inset Newline newline
36030 More information about this feature can be found in the
36036 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36042 \begin_layout Subsection
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36047 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36050 \begin_layout Description
36051 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36052 \begin_inset script superscript
36054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36063 \begin_layout Description
36064 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36065 \begin_inset script subscript
36067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36076 \begin_layout Description
36078 \begin_inset space ~
36081 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36088 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36095 \begin_layout Description
36097 \begin_inset space ~
36100 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36107 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36114 \begin_layout Description
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36119 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36126 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36133 \begin_layout Description
36135 \begin_inset space ~
36138 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36144 \begin_inset space \space{}
36147 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36148 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36157 To insert a fraction use the command
36162 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36166 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36175 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36182 \begin_layout Description
36184 \begin_inset space ~
36187 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36188 \begin_inset space ~
36192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36194 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36201 \begin_layout Description
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36206 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36213 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36220 \begin_layout Description
36222 \begin_inset space ~
36225 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36232 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36239 \begin_layout Description
36240 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36241 \begin_inset space ~
36245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36247 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36254 \begin_layout Description
36256 \begin_inset space ~
36259 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36260 \begin_inset space ~
36264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36266 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36273 \begin_layout Description
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36278 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36285 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36292 \begin_layout Description
36294 \begin_inset space ~
36298 \begin_inset space ~
36301 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36308 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36315 \begin_layout Description
36317 \begin_inset space ~
36320 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36321 as described in section
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36328 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36335 \begin_layout Description
36337 \begin_inset space ~
36340 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36347 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36354 \begin_layout Description
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36359 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36360 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36362 \begin_inset space ~
36366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36368 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36375 \begin_layout Description
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36380 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36387 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36394 \begin_layout Description
36396 \begin_inset space ~
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36403 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36404 \begin_inset space ~
36408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36410 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36417 \begin_layout Subsection
36421 \begin_layout Standard
36422 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36447 are described in section
36448 \begin_inset space ~
36452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36454 reference "sec:toc"
36463 is described in section
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36470 reference "sec:Index"
36478 is described in section
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36485 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36491 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36494 is described in section
36495 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36501 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36508 \begin_layout Subsection
36512 \begin_layout Standard
36513 To insert floats, as described in section
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36520 reference "sec:Floats"
36524 and in detail the chapter
36531 \begin_inset space ~
36539 \begin_layout Subsection
36543 \begin_layout Standard
36544 To insert notes, described in section
36545 \begin_inset space ~
36549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36551 reference "sec:Notes"
36558 \begin_layout Subsection
36562 \begin_layout Standard
36563 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36565 Branches are described in section
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36572 reference "sec:Branches"
36579 \begin_layout Subsection
36583 \begin_layout Standard
36584 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36585 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36587 An example is the document class
36588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36595 with three custom insets.
36598 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36602 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36608 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36611 \begin_layout Subsection
36613 \begin_inset Index idx
36616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36625 \begin_layout Standard
36626 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36628 For more information see chapter
36630 External Document Parts
36633 \begin_inset space ~
36639 \begin_layout Subsection
36641 \begin_inset Index idx
36644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36653 \begin_layout Standard
36654 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36655 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36662 \begin_inset space ~
36670 \begin_layout Subsection
36674 \begin_layout Standard
36679 dialog as described in section
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36686 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36693 \begin_layout Subsection
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36702 as described in section
36703 \begin_inset space ~
36707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36709 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36716 \begin_layout Subsection
36720 \begin_layout Standard
36725 as described in section
36726 \begin_inset space ~
36730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36732 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36739 \begin_layout Subsection
36741 \begin_inset Index idx
36744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36751 \begin_inset Index idx
36754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36755 Longtables ! Caption
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36764 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36765 Floats are described in section
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36772 reference "sec:Floats"
36776 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36783 \begin_inset space ~
36791 \begin_layout Subsection
36795 \begin_layout Standard
36796 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36797 \begin_inset space ~
36801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36803 reference "sec:Index"
36810 \begin_layout Subsection
36814 \begin_layout Standard
36815 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36816 \begin_inset space ~
36820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36822 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36829 \begin_layout Subsection
36833 \begin_layout Standard
36834 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36835 Tables are described in section
36836 \begin_inset space ~
36840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36842 reference "sec:Tables"
36846 and in detail in the chapter
36853 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_layout Subsection
36865 \begin_layout Standard
36871 Graphics are described in section
36872 \begin_inset space ~
36876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36878 reference "sec:Graphics"
36885 \begin_layout Subsection
36889 \begin_layout Standard
36890 Inserts a URL as described in section
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36897 reference "subsec:URLs"
36904 \begin_layout Subsection
36908 \begin_layout Standard
36909 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36910 \begin_inset space ~
36914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36916 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
36923 \begin_layout Subsection
36927 \begin_layout Standard
36928 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36929 \begin_inset space ~
36933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36935 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36942 \begin_layout Subsection
36946 \begin_layout Standard
36947 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36948 \begin_inset space ~
36952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36954 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36961 \begin_layout Subsection
36965 \begin_layout Standard
36966 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36967 title or caption of a float.
36968 Inserts a short title as described in section
36969 \begin_inset space ~
36973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36975 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36982 \begin_layout Subsection
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36988 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
36989 Code box as described in section
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36996 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37003 \begin_layout Subsection
37005 \begin_inset Index idx
37008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37017 \begin_layout Standard
37018 Inserts a program listings box.
37019 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37021 Program Code Listings
37026 \begin_inset space ~
37034 \begin_layout Subsection
37038 \begin_layout Standard
37039 Inserts the actual date.
37040 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37044 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37052 \begin_inset space ~
37060 \begin_layout Subsection
37064 \begin_layout Standard
37065 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37066 \begin_inset space ~
37070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37072 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37079 \begin_layout Section
37081 \begin_inset Index idx
37084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37093 \begin_layout Standard
37094 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37098 of the current document.
37099 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37102 \begin_layout Subsection
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37108 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37109 to jump, for example, between section
37110 \begin_inset space ~
37114 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37118 2.5 and use the submenu
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37125 \begin_inset space ~
37132 \begin_inset space ~
37138 \begin_inset space ~
37142 \begin_inset space ~
37148 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37152 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37158 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37161 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37164 \begin_layout Standard
37165 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37169 \begin_inset space ~
37174 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37182 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37185 \begin_layout Subsection
37186 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37189 \begin_layout Standard
37190 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37194 \begin_layout Subsection
37198 \begin_layout Standard
37199 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37200 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37201 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37205 \begin_inset space ~
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_layout Subsection
37221 \begin_layout Standard
37222 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37225 The \SpecialChar LyX
37226 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37228 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37241 manual for a detailed description.
37244 \begin_layout Section
37246 \begin_inset Index idx
37249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 \begin_layout Subsection
37262 \begin_layout Standard
37263 Change Tracking is described in section
37264 \begin_inset space ~
37268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37270 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37277 \begin_layout Subsection
37285 \begin_layout Standard
37286 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37287 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37288 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37290 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37291 to the clipboard or update the view.
37292 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37296 \begin_layout Subsection
37297 Start Appendix Here
37300 \begin_layout Standard
37301 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37302 as described in section
37303 \begin_inset space ~
37307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37309 reference "sec:Appendices"
37316 \begin_layout Subsection
37318 \begin_inset space ~
37324 \begin_layout Standard
37325 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37326 default output format for the document (menu
37328 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37329 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37330 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37332 \begin_inset space ~
37336 \begin_inset space ~
37342 \begin_inset space ~
37346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37348 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37352 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37356 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37358 \begin_inset space ~
37361 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37363 \begin_inset space ~
37366 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37368 \begin_inset space ~
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37384 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37388 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37389 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37392 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37397 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37402 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37412 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37417 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37418 when it is first configured.
37419 The default output format is
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37430 \begin_layout Subsection
37431 View (Other Formats)
37434 \begin_layout Standard
37435 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37436 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37437 actual document with an external program.
37438 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37439 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37440 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37442 All possible formats are listed in section
37443 \begin_inset space ~
37447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37449 reference "subsec:Export"
37454 You should at least see the menu entry
37459 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37461 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37463 \begin_inset space ~
37467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37469 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37474 \begin_inset Index idx
37477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37478 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37488 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37489 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37492 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37497 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37502 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37512 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37517 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37518 when it is first configured.
37521 \begin_layout Subsection
37523 \begin_inset space ~
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37530 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37531 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37534 \begin_layout Subsection
37535 Update (Other Formats)
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37539 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37540 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37543 \begin_layout Subsection
37544 View Master Document
37547 \begin_layout Standard
37548 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37569 manual for more information on this topic).
37570 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37571 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37575 \begin_inset space ~
37579 \begin_inset space ~
37584 generates the output of the whole book, while
37588 will just output the chapter alone.
37591 \begin_layout Standard
37592 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37593 in the document settings (menu
37595 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37596 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37597 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37615 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37619 ) or in the preferences (menu
37621 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37622 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37627 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37632 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37634 \begin_inset space ~
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37650 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37657 \begin_layout Subsection
37658 Update Master Document
37661 \begin_layout Standard
37662 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37683 manual for more information on this topic).
37684 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37685 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37688 \begin_layout Standard
37689 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37690 in the document settings (menu
37692 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37693 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37694 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37696 \begin_inset space ~
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37706 \begin_inset space ~
37710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37712 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37716 ) or in the preferences (menu
37718 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37719 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37724 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37726 \begin_inset space ~
37729 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37735 \begin_inset space ~
37741 \begin_inset space ~
37745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37747 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37754 \begin_layout Subsection
37756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37758 name "subsec:Compressed"
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37766 Un/compresses the current document.
37767 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
37768 compression (see the
37770 Additional Features
37772 manual for details).
37775 \begin_layout Subsection
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 The document settings are described in appendix
37781 \begin_inset space ~
37785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37787 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37794 \begin_layout Section
37796 \begin_inset Index idx
37799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 \begin_layout Subsection
37812 \begin_layout Standard
37813 Spell checking is explained in section
37814 \begin_inset space ~
37818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37820 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37827 \begin_layout Subsection
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 The thesaurus is described in section
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37839 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37846 \begin_layout Subsection
37848 \begin_inset Index idx
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37858 \begin_inset Index idx
37861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 \begin_layout Standard
37871 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37872 the highlighted document part.
37875 \begin_layout Subsection
37881 \begin_inset Index idx
37884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37885 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37894 \begin_layout Standard
37895 Generates with the help of the program
37897 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
37900 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
37901 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
37902 This feature is not available on Windows.
37905 \begin_layout Subsection
37911 \begin_inset Index idx
37914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37924 \begin_layout Standard
37925 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37930 \begin_inset space ~
37935 to see the full filename paths.
37938 \begin_layout Subsection
37940 \begin_inset Index idx
37943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37953 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
37954 files as described in section
37955 \begin_inset space ~
37959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37961 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37968 \begin_layout Subsection
37970 \begin_inset Index idx
37973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37986 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38004 \begin_inset Index idx
38007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38017 \begin_layout Standard
38018 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38019 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38020 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38021 -packages and programs it needs; see
38023 \begin_inset space ~
38027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38029 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38036 \begin_layout Subsection
38040 \begin_layout Standard
38045 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38052 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38059 \begin_layout Section
38061 \begin_inset Index idx
38064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38075 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38077 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38086 \begin_inset space ~
38091 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38092 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38093 packages and classes found
38094 by \SpecialChar LyX
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38102 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38109 \begin_layout Standard
38113 \begin_inset space ~
38118 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38123 \begin_layout Section
38125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38127 name "sec:Toolbars"
38134 \begin_layout Standard
38135 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38136 \begin_inset space ~
38140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38142 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38149 \begin_layout Standard
38150 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38151 This is described in the
38153 Additional Features
38158 \begin_layout Subsection
38160 \begin_inset Index idx
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 \begin_inset Graphics
38174 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38190 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38207 \begin_inset Note Note
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38211 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38216 manual for more information.
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38225 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38231 \begin_layout Standard
38232 \begin_inset Tabular
38233 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38234 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38235 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38236 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38242 \begin_inset Graphics
38243 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38257 pull-down box for the environments
38270 \begin_layout Standard
38271 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38277 \begin_layout Standard
38279 \begin_inset Tabular
38280 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38281 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38282 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38283 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38307 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38337 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38367 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38383 arg "dialog-show print"
38391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38397 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38413 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38434 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38547 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38584 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38593 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38633 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38647 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38675 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38689 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38690 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 Emphasize text, function of the
38720 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38725 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38755 Set text to noun style, function of the
38757 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38759 \begin_inset space ~
38762 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38780 arg "textstyle-apply"
38788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 Format text using the current settings in the
38794 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38799 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
38808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38832 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38852 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38880 arg "tabular-insert"
38888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38910 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38922 Toggle outline window on/off,
38924 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38940 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38967 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38979 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38992 \begin_layout Subsection
38994 \begin_inset Index idx
38997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39006 \begin_layout Standard
39007 \begin_inset Graphics
39008 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39016 \begin_layout Standard
39017 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39023 \begin_layout Standard
39024 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39035 \begin_layout Standard
39036 \begin_inset Tabular
39037 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39038 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39039 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39040 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39077 arg "layout Enumerate"
39085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39104 arg "layout Itemize"
39112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39158 arg "layout Description"
39166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39185 arg "depth-increment"
39193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39201 \begin_inset space ~
39205 \begin_inset space ~
39214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39223 arg "depth-decrement"
39231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39239 \begin_inset space ~
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 arg "float-insert figure"
39269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39276 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39292 arg "float-insert table"
39300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39307 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39344 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39374 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39383 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39404 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39429 \begin_inset space ~
39438 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39447 arg "nomencl-insert"
39455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39463 \begin_inset space ~
39472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39481 arg "footnote-insert"
39489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39495 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39511 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39525 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39560 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39562 \begin_inset space ~
39571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39580 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39624 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39656 \begin_inset space ~
39665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39674 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39689 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39705 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39720 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39731 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39740 arg "dialog-show character"
39748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39754 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39756 \begin_inset space ~
39759 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 arg "layout-paragraph"
39783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39789 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39823 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39837 \begin_layout Subsection
39838 View/Update Toolbar
39839 \begin_inset Index idx
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39843 Toolbar ! View / Update
39851 \begin_layout Standard
39852 \begin_inset Graphics
39853 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39860 \begin_layout Standard
39861 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39872 \begin_layout Standard
39873 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39879 \begin_layout Standard
39880 \begin_inset Tabular
39881 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39882 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39883 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39884 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39885 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39924 arg "buffer-update"
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39938 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 arg "master-buffer-view"
39962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39970 \begin_inset space ~
39979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 arg "master-buffer-update"
39996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40026 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40041 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40042 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40043 Synchronize with Output
40049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40054 \begin_inset Graphics
40055 filename ../images/view-others.png
40057 groupId toolbarbuttons
40068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40075 View (Other Formats)
40081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40086 \begin_inset Graphics
40087 filename ../images/update-others.png
40089 groupId toolbarbuttons
40098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40105 Update (Other Formats)
40118 \begin_layout Standard
40119 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40123 \begin_layout Subsection
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40128 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40135 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40139 , the table toolbar
40140 \begin_inset Index idx
40143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40152 \begin_inset space ~
40157 manual and the math macro toolbar
40158 \begin_inset Index idx
40161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40174 \begin_layout Chapter
40175 The Document Settings
40176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40178 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40183 \begin_inset Index idx
40186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40187 Document ! Settings
40195 \begin_layout Standard
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40204 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40205 is called with the menu
40207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40211 You can save your document settings as default with the
40213 Save as Document Defaults
40215 button in any dialog.
40216 This will create a template named
40220 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40221 when you create a new document without
40225 \begin_layout Standard
40230 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40231 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40234 \begin_layout Standard
40235 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40236 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40237 to find the one you are looking for.
40238 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40239 the submenus of the dialog.
40241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40245 \begin_inset space \space{}
40249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40256 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40257 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40258 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40261 \begin_layout Section
40265 \begin_layout Standard
40266 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40268 Document classes are described in section
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40275 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40283 \begin_layout Standard
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40292 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40297 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40298 as a layout for a document class.
40299 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40301 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40310 \begin_layout Standard
40311 Some classes use special class options by default.
40312 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40316 and you can decide to use them or not.
40317 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40318 recommended you leave them untouched.
40323 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40324 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40329 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40331 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40337 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40338 \begin_inset Newline newline
40343 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40346 \begin_inset Newline newline
40349 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40350 distribution, see section
40355 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40357 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40369 \begin_layout Standard
40374 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40375 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40376 in the background if the child document
40377 is opened without its master.
40378 This way child documents are always compilable.
40379 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40386 \begin_inset space ~
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40395 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40406 \begin_inset Index idx
40409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40411 -packages ! prettyref
40417 \begin_inset Index idx
40420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40422 -packages ! refstyle
40427 for cross-references, see section
40428 \begin_inset space ~
40432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40434 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40441 \begin_layout Section
40445 \begin_layout Standard
40446 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40447 Please refer to the section
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40463 manual for details.
40466 \begin_layout Section
40470 \begin_layout Standard
40471 Modules are explained in section
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40478 reference "subsec:Modules"
40485 \begin_layout Section
40489 \begin_layout Standard
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40497 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40504 \begin_layout Section
40508 \begin_layout Standard
40509 The document font settings are described in section
40510 \begin_inset space ~
40514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40516 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40523 \begin_layout Section
40527 \begin_layout Standard
40528 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40540 \begin_inset space ~
40545 and whether it should be a
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40553 can also be specified here.
40556 \begin_layout Standard
40557 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40558 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40559 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40561 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40564 \begin_layout Standard
40567 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40570 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40571 justifies the text on screen.
40572 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40576 \begin_layout Section
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40581 This dialog is described in sections
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40588 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40595 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40602 \begin_layout Section
40606 \begin_layout Standard
40607 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40608 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40614 reference "subsec:Margins"
40621 \begin_layout Section
40623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40625 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40630 \begin_inset Index idx
40633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40634 Language ! Encoding
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40643 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40644 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40645 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40647 is always encoded in utf8).
40648 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40649 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40650 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40651 -command is not known for
40652 a particular character).
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 If you use the option
40661 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40662 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40663 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40665 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40666 exactly one encoding.
40667 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40670 \begin_layout Standard
40672 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40673 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40674 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40675 installation supports Unicode), choose
40676 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40677 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40678 is quite incomplete, so
40679 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40684 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40685 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40686 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40687 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40688 -commands is not used, because all
40689 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40690 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40691 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40692 , two new alternative engines
40693 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40695 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40697 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40700 \begin_inset space ~
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40728 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40733 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40737 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40740 \begin_layout Standard
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40749 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40750 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40760 The possible settings are:
40763 \begin_layout Description
40764 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40766 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40767 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40771 \begin_inset space ~
40775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40777 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
40784 \begin_layout Description
40785 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40786 format you will use.
40787 In many cases this will be
40792 \begin_inset Index idx
40795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40803 If the newer package
40808 \begin_inset Index idx
40811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40813 -packages ! polyglossia
40818 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40819 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40820 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
40822 this package will be used instead of
40829 \begin_layout Description
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40842 would be more appropriate.
40845 \begin_layout Description
40846 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40847 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40851 (for German texts), type in
40854 \begin_inset Newline newline
40859 usepackage{ngerman}
40862 \begin_layout Description
40863 None will not use a language package.
40864 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40867 \begin_layout Standard
40868 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40871 \begin_layout Description
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40888 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40894 \begin_inset Index idx
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40899 -packages ! inputenc
40905 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40906 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40907 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
40911 \begin_layout Description
40912 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40914 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
40915 commands, which may result in a big
40916 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
40917 -commands are needed.
40920 \begin_layout Description
40922 \begin_inset space ~
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40929 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40932 \begin_layout Description
40934 \begin_inset space ~
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40941 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40944 \begin_layout Description
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40949 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40952 \begin_layout Description
40954 \begin_inset space ~
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40961 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40962 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40965 \begin_layout Description
40967 \begin_inset space ~
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40974 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40978 \begin_layout Description
40980 \begin_inset space ~
40984 \begin_inset space ~
40987 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40988 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40991 \begin_layout Description
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_inset space ~
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41004 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41011 \begin_layout Description
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset space ~
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41024 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41025 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41028 \begin_layout Description
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41037 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41038 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41039 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41040 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41041 \begin_inset space ~
41045 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_layout Description
41053 \begin_inset space ~
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41060 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41061 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41062 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41064 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41075 \begin_layout Description
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41084 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41087 \begin_layout Description
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41096 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41099 \begin_layout Description
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset space ~
41108 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41111 \begin_layout Description
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41116 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41119 \begin_layout Description
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41124 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41127 \begin_layout Description
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41136 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41139 \begin_layout Description
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41151 \begin_layout Description
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41157 \begin_inset space ~
41160 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41163 \begin_layout Description
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41175 \begin_layout Description
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41181 \begin_inset space ~
41184 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41190 \begin_inset Index idx
41193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41200 , when using this, set the document language to
41205 \begin_layout Description
41207 \begin_inset space ~
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41214 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41219 , when using this, set the document language to
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41228 \begin_layout Description
41230 \begin_inset space ~
41234 \begin_inset space ~
41237 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41243 \begin_inset Index idx
41246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41248 -packages ! japanese
41253 , when using this, set the document language to
41258 \begin_layout Description
41260 \begin_inset space ~
41264 \begin_inset space ~
41267 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41272 , when using this, set the document language to
41277 \begin_layout Description
41279 \begin_inset space ~
41283 \begin_inset space ~
41286 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41291 , when using this, set the document language to
41296 \begin_layout Description
41298 \begin_inset space ~
41301 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41304 \begin_layout Description
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41314 \begin_inset space ~
41317 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41320 \begin_layout Description
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_inset space ~
41333 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41334 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41335 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41338 \begin_layout Description
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41350 \begin_layout Description
41352 \begin_inset space ~
41356 \begin_inset space ~
41359 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41360 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41363 \begin_layout Description
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_inset space ~
41372 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41378 \begin_inset Index idx
41381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41388 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41391 \begin_layout Description
41393 \begin_inset space ~
41401 \begin_inset space ~
41404 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41411 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41414 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41421 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41422 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41424 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41427 \begin_layout Description
41429 \begin_inset space ~
41433 \begin_inset space ~
41436 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41442 \begin_inset Index idx
41445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41452 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41455 \begin_layout Description
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41460 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41466 \begin_inset Index idx
41469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41471 -packages ! inputenc
41477 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41481 \begin_layout Description
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41494 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41501 \begin_layout Description
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41514 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41515 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41516 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41520 \begin_layout Description
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41533 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41534 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41537 \begin_layout Section
41539 \begin_inset Index idx
41542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41549 \begin_inset Index idx
41552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41559 \begin_inset Index idx
41562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41563 Color ! Shaded boxes
41569 \begin_inset Index idx
41572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41581 \begin_layout Standard
41582 Here you can alter the font color for the
41586 (default: black), for
41589 \begin_inset space ~
41594 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41598 (default: white) and for
41601 \begin_inset space ~
41611 sets the color back to the default.
41614 \begin_layout Standard
41615 Clicking any button showing
41623 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41624 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41625 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41626 later more quickly.
41629 \begin_layout Standard
41630 Note, if you change the
41633 \begin_inset space ~
41638 font color and use the option
41641 \begin_inset space ~
41646 in the document settings under
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41654 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41661 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41668 \begin_layout Standard
41669 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41675 \begin_layout Standard
41679 \begin_inset space ~
41688 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41691 \begin_inset space ~
41694 Code after a forced page break:
41697 \begin_layout Itemize
41698 For the page color:
41699 \begin_inset Newline newline
41706 pagecolor{color name}
41709 \begin_layout Itemize
41710 For the text color:
41711 \begin_inset Newline newline
41721 \begin_layout Standard
41722 You are restricted to one of
41758 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41771 \begin_inset Newline newline
41774 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41775 names to refer to them:
41778 \begin_layout Itemize
41784 \begin_inset Newline newline
41789 page_backgroundcolor
41792 \begin_layout Itemize
41796 \begin_inset space ~
41802 \begin_inset Newline newline
41810 \begin_layout Itemize
41814 \begin_inset space ~
41820 \begin_inset Newline newline
41828 \begin_layout Itemize
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset Newline newline
41846 \begin_layout Standard
41847 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41866 \begin_layout Section
41870 \begin_layout Standard
41871 Here you can adjust the
41875 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41879 as described in section
41880 \begin_inset space ~
41884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41886 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41893 \begin_layout Section
41897 \begin_layout Standard
41898 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41904 \begin_inset Index idx
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 \begin_inset Index idx
41922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41924 -packages ! jurabib
41932 Sectioned bibliography
41934 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41940 \begin_inset Index idx
41943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41945 -packages ! bibtopic
41950 and you can select a
41954 for the generation of the bibliography.
41955 For a further description see section
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41969 \begin_layout Section
41973 \begin_layout Standard
41974 Here you can define the
41978 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41980 \begin_inset space ~
41984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41986 reference "sec:Index"
41993 \begin_layout Section
41997 \begin_layout Standard
41998 The PDF properties are explained in section
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42005 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42012 \begin_layout Section
42016 \begin_layout Standard
42017 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42018 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42024 \begin_inset Index idx
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42029 -packages ! amsmath
42039 \begin_inset Index idx
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42044 -packages ! amssymb
42054 \begin_inset Index idx
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42069 \begin_inset Index idx
42072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42084 \begin_inset Index idx
42087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 -packages ! mathdots
42099 \begin_inset Index idx
42102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42104 -packages ! mathtools
42114 \begin_inset Index idx
42117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42129 \begin_inset Index idx
42132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42134 -packages ! stackrel
42144 \begin_inset Index idx
42147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42149 -packages ! stmaryrd
42159 \begin_inset Index idx
42162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 -packages ! undertilde
42169 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42172 \begin_layout Description
42173 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42174 -errors in formulas,
42175 ensure that you have this enabled.
42178 \begin_layout Description
42179 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42180 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42181 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42185 \begin_layout Description
42186 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42189 \begin_inset space ~
42201 \begin_layout Description
42202 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42205 \begin_inset space ~
42217 \begin_layout Description
42218 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42229 \begin_layout Description
42230 mathtools is used for the math commands
42266 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42273 \begin_layout Description
42274 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42276 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42285 \begin_layout Description
42286 stackrel is used for the math command
42303 \begin_layout Description
42304 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42307 \begin_layout Description
42308 undertilde is used for the math command
42316 Accents for one Character
42325 \begin_layout Section
42329 \begin_layout Standard
42330 The float placement options are described in the section
42333 \begin_inset space ~
42341 \begin_inset space ~
42349 \begin_layout Section
42353 \begin_layout Standard
42354 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42356 Program Code Listings
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_layout Section
42373 \begin_layout Standard
42374 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42382 set to be used and set the
42387 The itemize environment is described in section
42388 \begin_inset space ~
42392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42394 reference "sec:Itemize"
42401 \begin_layout Standard
42402 You can furthermore specify a
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42410 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42411 command of the desired character.
42412 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42419 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42425 \begin_inset space \space{}
42429 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42439 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42440 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42452 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42453 -packages in the preamble (menu
42456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42457 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42460 \begin_inset space ~
42466 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42470 usepackage{textcomp}
42473 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42477 usepackage{amssymb}
42487 \begin_layout Section
42491 \begin_layout Standard
42492 Branches are described in section
42493 \begin_inset space ~
42497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42499 reference "sec:Branches"
42506 \begin_layout Section
42508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42510 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42517 \begin_layout Standard
42518 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42521 \begin_layout Description
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42527 \begin_inset space ~
42530 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42550 View Master Document
42551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42558 Update Master Document
42559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42566 menu or the toolbar.
42567 The default is set in
42569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42570 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42572 \begin_inset space ~
42575 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42585 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42592 \begin_layout Description
42594 \begin_inset space ~
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42601 Output settings for the menu
42603 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42611 For a detailed description see section
42613 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_layout Description
42628 \begin_inset space ~
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42635 Options offers settings for the export format
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42648 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42649 \begin_inset space ~
42652 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42656 \begin_inset space ~
42661 settings are described in detail in section
42663 Math Output in XHTML
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42681 \begin_inset space ~
42686 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42689 \begin_layout Section
42697 \begin_layout Standard
42698 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42700 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42702 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42704 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42710 -syntax is given in section
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42717 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42724 \begin_layout Chapter
42730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42732 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42737 \begin_inset Index idx
42740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42749 \begin_layout Standard
42750 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42752 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42756 It has the following submenus.
42759 \begin_layout Section
42763 \begin_layout Subsection
42767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42768 User Interface File
42769 \begin_inset Index idx
42772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42773 Customization ! of toolbars
42779 \begin_inset Index idx
42782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42783 Customization ! of menus
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42792 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42793 interface (ui) file.
42794 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42802 \begin_layout Description
42807 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42810 \begin_layout Description
42817 the menu entries in popup context menus
42820 \begin_layout Description
42825 specifies the toolbar buttons
42828 \begin_layout Standard
42829 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42830 and edit the entries.
42833 \begin_layout Standard
42834 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42846 entries must be finished with an explicit
42871 and in the case of the
42872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42884 The syntax for the entries is:
42887 \begin_layout Standard
42888 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42917 \begin_layout Standard
42919 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42922 All the \SpecialChar LyX
42923 -functions are listed in the menu
42925 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42927 \begin_inset space ~
42935 \begin_layout Standard
42936 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42942 \begin_layout Standard
42943 For example, assuming you use the menu
42945 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42948 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42952 \begin_layout Standard
42953 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42977 \begin_layout Standard
42979 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42994 to have the sixth bookmark.
42997 \begin_layout Standard
43001 \begin_inset space ~
43006 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43007 's toolbar buttons.
43008 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43012 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43019 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43023 \begin_layout Standard
43026 Enable tool tips in main work area
43028 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43036 \begin_layout Standard
43041 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43042 should display in the menu
43044 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43046 \begin_inset space ~
43054 \begin_layout Subsection
43058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43062 \begin_layout Standard
43065 Restore window layouts and geometries
43068 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43069 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43073 \begin_layout Standard
43076 Restore cursor positions
43078 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43082 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Load opened files from last session
43087 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43091 \begin_layout Standard
43094 Clear all session information
43096 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43097 sessions (cursor positions, names
43098 of last opened documents, etc.).
43101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43105 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43110 \begin_inset Index idx
43113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43125 Backup original documents when saving
43127 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43128 it was saved the last time.
43129 It is stored in the
43132 \begin_inset space ~
43138 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43144 reference "sec:Paths"
43148 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43157 The backup file has the file extension
43158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43172 \begin_layout Standard
43175 Backup documents, every
43177 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43180 \begin_layout Standard
43183 Save documents compressed by default
43185 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43192 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43197 This applies to newly created documents only.
43198 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43202 Windows & work area
43205 \begin_layout Standard
43208 Open documents in tabs
43210 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43214 \begin_layout Standard
43219 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43232 reference "sec:Paths"
43236 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43243 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43244 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43245 of \SpecialChar LyX
43247 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43248 instance is created for each file.
43251 \begin_layout Standard
43254 Single close-tab button
43256 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43259 \begin_inset Graphics
43260 filename ../images/closetab.png
43267 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43268 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43271 \begin_layout Standard
43272 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43280 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43281 before the change takes effect.
43289 \begin_layout Standard
43294 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43296 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43298 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43302 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43303 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43304 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43307 \begin_layout Subsection
43309 \begin_inset Index idx
43312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43321 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43328 \begin_layout Standard
43329 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43333 \begin_layout Standard
43334 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43342 This section only deals with the fonts
43346 the \SpecialChar LyX
43348 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43352 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43363 \begin_layout Standard
43364 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43381 (depends on the system) as its
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43400 \begin_layout Standard
43401 You can change the font size with the
43408 \begin_layout Standard
43413 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43418 points have the size of 1
43419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43423 \begin_inset space ~
43427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43429 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43434 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43439 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43446 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43453 \begin_layout Standard
43456 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43458 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43459 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43460 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43461 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43462 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43464 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43471 \begin_layout Subsection
43473 \begin_inset Index idx
43476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43477 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43484 \begin_inset Index idx
43487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 \begin_layout Standard
43497 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43498 by choosing an item in the
43499 list and selecting the
43506 \begin_layout Standard
43507 By checking the option
43511 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43514 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43524 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43527 \begin_layout Subsection
43529 \begin_inset Index idx
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43541 \begin_layout Standard
43542 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43546 \begin_layout Standard
43551 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43552 This feature is described in section
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43559 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43566 \begin_layout Standard
43567 Checking the option
43570 \begin_inset space ~
43574 \begin_inset space ~
43578 \begin_inset space ~
43583 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43586 \begin_layout Section
43588 \begin_inset Index idx
43591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43600 \begin_layout Subsection
43604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43608 \begin_layout Standard
43611 Cursor follows scrollbar
43613 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43618 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43619 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43620 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43623 \begin_layout Standard
43626 Scroll below end of document
43628 is self-explanatory.
43631 \begin_layout Standard
43632 In \SpecialChar LyX
43633 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43640 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43642 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43643 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43646 \begin_layout Standard
43649 Sort environments alphabetically
43651 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43654 \begin_layout Standard
43657 Group environments by their category
43659 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43662 \begin_layout Standard
43667 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43682 \begin_layout Standard
43683 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43688 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43689 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43693 \begin_layout Subsection
43695 \begin_inset Index idx
43698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43705 \begin_inset Index idx
43708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43709 Settings ! Shortcuts
43717 \begin_layout Standard
43722 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43724 Several binding files are available, among them:
43727 \begin_layout Description
43728 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43731 \begin_layout Description
43732 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43744 \begin_layout Description
43745 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43756 \begin_layout Standard
43757 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43762 , and binding files for special languages.
43763 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43768 \begin_inset space \space{}
43772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43780 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
43781 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
43782 will try to use the appropriate binding
43786 \begin_layout Standard
43787 Some binding files, like
43791 , only have a limited scope.
43792 When looking at the end of the file
43796 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43799 \begin_layout Standard
43803 \begin_inset space ~
43807 \begin_inset space ~
43812 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43813 in the selected key binding file.
43816 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43820 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
43825 \begin_inset Index idx
43828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43829 Key Bindings ! Editing
43837 \begin_layout Standard
43838 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43839 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
43840 functions and the bound shortcuts.
43841 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43844 Show key-bindings containing
43847 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43848 Insert there for example as keyword
43849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43856 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43857 functions that contain
43858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43866 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43867 All \SpecialChar LyX
43868 functions are also listed in the file
43873 that you will find in the
43880 \begin_layout Standard
43881 For example, to add the shortcut
43889 , select the function and press the
43894 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43895 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43898 \begin_layout Standard
43899 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43900 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
43902 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
43903 function names as a semicolon separated list.
43905 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43911 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43914 \begin_layout Standard
43915 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43917 The syntax of the entries is:
43920 \begin_layout Standard
43926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43945 \begin_layout Subsection
43947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43949 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
43954 \begin_inset Index idx
43957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43964 \begin_inset Index idx
43967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43968 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43976 \begin_layout Standard
43977 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43978 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
43979 provides keyboard maps.
43980 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43981 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43993 and select the keyboard map file named
44000 \begin_layout Standard
44009 keyboard map and, if you use the
44013 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44016 arg "keymap-primary"
44022 arg "keymap-secondary"
44025 respectively or toggle between them with
44028 arg "keymap-toggle"
44034 \begin_layout Standard
44035 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44043 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44052 \begin_layout Standard
44053 You can also specify the mouse
44055 Wheel scrolling speed
44058 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44074 \begin_inset space ~
44079 you can select a key for zooming.
44080 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44083 \begin_layout Subsection
44087 \begin_layout Standard
44088 Input completion is described in section
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44095 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44102 \begin_layout Section
44104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44111 \begin_inset Index idx
44114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44121 \begin_inset Index idx
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44133 \begin_layout Standard
44134 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44135 are normally determined during
44137 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44140 \begin_layout Description
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44145 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44146 's working directory.
44147 It is the default when you
44158 \begin_inset space ~
44166 \begin_layout Description
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44171 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44173 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44175 \begin_inset space ~
44179 \begin_inset space ~
44187 \begin_layout Description
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44192 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44198 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44202 \begin_inset Newline newline
44206 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44218 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44219 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44227 \begin_layout Description
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44233 \begin_inset Index idx
44236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44242 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44243 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44250 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44258 will be used to save the backups.
44259 \begin_inset Newline newline
44262 Backup files have the ending
44263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44273 \begin_layout Description
44275 \begin_inset space ~
44278 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44279 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44281 \begin_inset Newline newline
44288 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44294 You can edit this file with the program
44303 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44304 in its preferences under
44307 \begin_inset space ~
44313 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44318 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44320 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44321 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44327 and \SpecialChar LyX
44328 need to be running the same time.
44329 \begin_inset Newline newline
44332 The pipe is also used for the
44337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44343 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44348 \begin_inset Newline newline
44351 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44352 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44353 \begin_inset Newline newline
44369 \begin_layout Description
44371 \begin_inset space ~
44374 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44377 \begin_layout Description
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44382 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44383 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44384 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44387 \begin_layout Description
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44392 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44398 You only need to specify it if you are using
44402 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44404 For \SpecialChar LyX
44409 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44413 \begin_layout Description
44415 \begin_inset space ~
44418 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44419 When \SpecialChar LyX
44420 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44421 to find it on the system.
44422 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44424 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44430 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44433 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44434 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44437 \begin_layout Description
44439 \begin_inset space ~
44442 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44443 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44444 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44445 code or in the document
44447 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44449 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44450 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44451 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44452 scanned for the input files.
44453 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44454 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44456 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44457 compilation may fail for some documents.
44460 \begin_layout Section
44464 \begin_layout Standard
44465 Here you can insert your
44474 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44476 \begin_inset space ~
44480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44482 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44486 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44489 \begin_layout Section
44491 \begin_inset Index idx
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44495 Language ! Settings
44501 \begin_inset Index idx
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44505 Settings ! Language
44513 \begin_layout Subsection
44515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44517 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44524 \begin_layout Description
44526 \begin_inset space ~
44530 \begin_inset space ~
44533 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44535 You can find its actual translation status here:
44536 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44538 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44545 \begin_layout Description
44547 \begin_inset space ~
44550 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44551 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44552 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44553 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44570 The most widespread language package is
44575 \begin_inset Index idx
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44585 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44587 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44588 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44589 come with the alternative
44595 \begin_inset Index idx
44598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44600 -packages ! polyglossia
44605 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44606 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44612 The available selections are described in section
44613 \begin_inset space ~
44617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44619 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44626 \begin_layout Description
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44631 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44632 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44633 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44634 An example is the start command
44640 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44642 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44646 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44661 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44666 \begin_layout Description
44668 \begin_inset space ~
44676 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44677 command toggles the package on and off.
44680 \begin_layout Description
44682 \begin_inset space ~
44686 \begin_inset space ~
44689 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44693 \begin_layout Description
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44699 \begin_inset space ~
44702 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44706 \begin_layout Description
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44712 \begin_inset space ~
44715 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44716 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44717 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44719 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44726 \begin_layout Description
44728 \begin_inset space ~
44731 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44733 When this option is not set, the
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44741 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44743 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44754 \begin_layout Description
44756 \begin_inset space ~
44762 \begin_inset space ~
44768 When it is not set, the
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44776 is set to the end of the document.
44779 \begin_layout Description
44781 \begin_inset space ~
44785 \begin_inset space ~
44788 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44789 language will be underlined in blue.
44792 \begin_layout Description
44794 \begin_inset space ~
44798 \begin_inset space ~
44801 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44802 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44805 \begin_layout Description
44807 \begin_inset space ~
44810 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44811 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44812 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44813 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44816 \begin_layout Subsection
44820 \begin_layout Standard
44821 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44828 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44835 \begin_layout Section
44839 \begin_layout Subsection
44843 \begin_layout Description
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44849 \begin_inset space ~
44852 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44855 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44856 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
44858 \begin_inset space ~
44864 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44867 \begin_layout Description
44869 \begin_inset space ~
44873 \begin_inset Index idx
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44883 \begin_inset Index idx
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 Settings ! Date format
44892 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44893 \begin_inset Newline newline
44897 \begin_inset Flex URL
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44902 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
44908 \begin_inset Newline newline
44911 For example the format
44912 \begin_inset Newline newline
44916 \begin_inset Newline newline
44919 prints the date as day/month/year.
44922 \begin_layout Description
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44928 \begin_inset space ~
44931 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
44932 is allowed to overwrite on export.
44935 \begin_layout Description
44937 \begin_inset space ~
44940 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44942 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44950 For a detailed description see section
44952 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44965 \begin_layout Subsection
44971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44973 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
44978 \begin_inset Index idx
44981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44982 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
44991 \begin_layout Description
44993 \begin_inset space ~
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45008 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45013 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45034 are used for Cyrillic.
45035 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45048 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45050 sets up in the background.
45051 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45054 \begin_layout Description
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45063 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45068 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45072 \begin_layout Description
45074 \begin_inset space ~
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45082 \begin_inset space ~
45086 \begin_inset space ~
45089 options They only have an effect when the program
45093 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45096 \begin_layout Standard
45097 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45098 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45099 manuals of the applications.
45102 \begin_layout Description
45104 \begin_inset space ~
45107 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45108 \begin_inset space ~
45112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45114 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45121 \begin_layout Description
45123 \begin_inset space ~
45126 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45133 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45140 \begin_layout Description
45142 \begin_inset space ~
45145 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45146 \begin_inset space ~
45150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45152 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45159 \begin_layout Description
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45168 command Command for the program
45170 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45173 that is described in the section
45175 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45180 Additional Features
45185 \begin_layout Standard
45186 There are additionally the following options:
45189 \begin_layout Description
45191 \begin_inset space ~
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45211 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45229 to separate folders.
45230 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45232 \begin_inset Index idx
45235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45242 \begin_inset Index idx
45245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45254 \begin_layout Description
45256 \begin_inset space ~
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45272 \begin_inset space ~
45276 \begin_inset space ~
45279 changes Removes all manually set
45285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45286 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45288 \begin_inset space ~
45293 dialog when changing the document class.
45296 \begin_layout Section
45298 \begin_inset space ~
45302 \begin_inset Index idx
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45314 \begin_layout Subsection
45316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45318 name "subsec:Converters"
45323 \begin_inset Index idx
45326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45335 \begin_layout Standard
45336 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45337 from one format to another.
45338 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45339 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45346 \begin_inset space ~
45351 field and press the
45356 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45360 \begin_inset space ~
45365 drop-down list, modify the
45369 field and press the
45376 \begin_layout Standard
45379 Converter File Cache
45385 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45387 Maximum Age (in days
45390 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45391 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45394 \begin_layout Standard
45395 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45396 definition, is described in the section
45407 \begin_layout Subsection
45409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45411 name "sec:File-Formats"
45416 \begin_inset Index idx
45419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 \begin_inset Index idx
45429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45438 \begin_layout Standard
45439 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45449 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45452 \begin_layout Standard
45453 You can also define the
45455 Default output format
45457 that is used when you use
45459 View, Update, View Master Document
45463 Update Master Document
45469 menu or the toolbar.
45472 \begin_layout Standard
45473 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45484 \begin_layout Standard
45485 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45487 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45488 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45489 This is done by specifying a
45494 More about this is described in the section
45505 \begin_layout Chapter
45506 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45508 \begin_inset Index idx
45511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45520 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45527 \begin_layout Standard
45529 \begin_inset space ~
45533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45535 reference "tab:Units"
45539 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45540 and used in this documentation.
45543 \begin_layout Standard
45544 \begin_inset Float table
45550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45551 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45577 \begin_inset Tabular
45578 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45579 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45581 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45582 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 scaled point (65536
45789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45867 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45904 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45940 % of original image width
45945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 \begin_layout Chapter
46258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46260 name "chap:Credits"
46267 \begin_layout Standard
46268 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46269 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46272 \begin_layout Itemize
46275 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46278 \begin_layout Itemize
46284 \begin_layout Itemize
46290 \begin_layout Itemize
46296 \begin_layout Itemize
46302 \begin_layout Itemize
46308 \begin_layout Itemize
46314 \begin_layout Itemize
46320 \begin_layout Itemize
46323 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46326 \begin_layout Itemize
46332 \begin_layout Itemize
46338 \begin_layout Itemize
46344 \begin_layout Itemize
46350 \begin_layout Itemize
46356 \begin_layout Itemize
46362 \begin_layout Itemize
46368 \begin_layout Itemize
46374 \begin_layout Itemize
46375 The \SpecialChar LyX
46377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46386 \begin_layout Standard
46387 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46390 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46397 \begin_layout Bibliography
46398 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46399 LatexCommand bibitem
46405 The \SpecialChar LyX
46407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46410 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46415 \begin_inset Newline newline
46419 \begin_inset Flex URL
46422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46424 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46432 \begin_layout Bibliography
46433 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46434 LatexCommand bibitem
46435 key "latexcompanion"
46439 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46441 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46442 Companion Second Edition.
46445 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46448 \begin_layout Bibliography
46449 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46450 LatexCommand bibitem
46455 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46458 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46462 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46465 \begin_layout Bibliography
46466 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46467 LatexCommand bibitem
46475 : A Document Preparation System.
46478 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46481 \begin_layout Bibliography
46482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46483 LatexCommand bibitem
46492 The \SpecialChar TeX
46496 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46499 \begin_layout Bibliography
46500 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46501 LatexCommand bibitem
46506 The \SpecialChar TeX
46508 \begin_inset Newline newline
46512 \begin_inset Flex URL
46515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46517 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46525 \begin_layout Bibliography
46526 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46527 LatexCommand bibitem
46532 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46534 \begin_inset Newline newline
46538 \begin_inset Flex URL
46541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46551 \begin_layout Bibliography
46552 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46553 LatexCommand bibitem
46559 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46561 name "Documentation"
46562 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46568 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46572 \begin_inset Newline newline
46576 \begin_inset Flex URL
46579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46589 \begin_layout Bibliography
46590 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46591 LatexCommand bibitem
46597 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46599 name "Documentation"
46600 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46604 how to use the program
46606 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46610 \begin_inset Newline newline
46614 \begin_inset Flex URL
46617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46619 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46627 \begin_layout Bibliography
46628 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46629 LatexCommand bibitem
46635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46637 name "Documentation"
46638 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46647 \begin_inset Newline newline
46651 \begin_inset Flex URL
46654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46656 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46664 \begin_layout Bibliography
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46666 LatexCommand bibitem
46667 key "makeindex-man"
46672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46675 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46684 \begin_inset Newline newline
46688 \begin_inset Flex URL
46691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46693 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
46701 \begin_layout Bibliography
46702 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46703 LatexCommand bibitem
46709 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46711 name "Documentation"
46712 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46721 \begin_inset Newline newline
46725 \begin_inset Flex URL
46728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46730 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46738 \begin_layout Bibliography
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46740 LatexCommand bibitem
46746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46748 name "Documentation"
46749 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46753 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
46755 \begin_inset Newline newline
46759 \begin_inset Flex URL
46762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46764 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46772 \begin_layout Bibliography
46773 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46774 LatexCommand bibitem
46780 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46782 name "Documentation"
46783 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46787 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46793 \begin_inset Index idx
46796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46798 -packages ! caption
46804 \begin_inset Newline newline
46808 \begin_inset Flex URL
46811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46813 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46821 \begin_layout Bibliography
46822 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46823 LatexCommand bibitem
46829 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46831 name "Documentation"
46832 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46836 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46842 \begin_inset Index idx
46845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46847 -packages ! enumitem
46853 \begin_inset Newline newline
46857 \begin_inset Flex URL
46860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46862 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46870 \begin_layout Bibliography
46871 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46872 LatexCommand bibitem
46878 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46880 name "Documentation"
46881 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46885 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46891 \begin_inset Index idx
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46896 -packages ! fancyhdr
46902 \begin_inset Newline newline
46906 \begin_inset Flex URL
46909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46911 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46919 \begin_layout Bibliography
46920 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46921 LatexCommand bibitem
46927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46929 name "Documentation"
46930 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46934 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46940 \begin_inset Index idx
46943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 -packages ! hyperref
46951 \begin_inset Newline newline
46955 \begin_inset Flex URL
46958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46960 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46968 \begin_layout Bibliography
46969 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46970 LatexCommand bibitem
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46978 name "Documentation"
46979 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46983 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46989 \begin_inset Index idx
46992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46994 -packages ! nomencl
47000 \begin_inset Newline newline
47004 \begin_inset Flex URL
47007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47009 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47017 \begin_layout Bibliography
47018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47019 LatexCommand bibitem
47025 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47027 name "Documentation"
47028 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47032 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47038 \begin_inset Index idx
47041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47043 -packages ! prettyref
47049 \begin_inset Newline newline
47053 \begin_inset Flex URL
47056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47058 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47066 \begin_layout Bibliography
47067 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47068 LatexCommand bibitem
47074 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47076 name "Documentation"
47077 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47081 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47087 \begin_inset Index idx
47090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47092 -packages ! refstyle
47098 \begin_inset Newline newline
47102 \begin_inset Flex URL
47105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47107 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47115 \begin_layout Bibliography
47116 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47117 LatexCommand bibitem
47123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47126 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47130 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47132 \begin_inset Newline newline
47136 \begin_inset Flex URL
47139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47141 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47149 \begin_layout Bibliography
47150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47151 LatexCommand bibitem
47157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47160 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47164 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47166 \begin_inset Newline newline
47170 \begin_inset Flex URL
47173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47175 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47183 \begin_layout Bibliography
47184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47185 LatexCommand bibitem
47191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47194 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47198 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47199 for Cyrillic languages:
47200 \begin_inset Newline newline
47204 \begin_inset Flex URL
47207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47209 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47217 \begin_layout Bibliography
47218 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47219 LatexCommand bibitem
47225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47228 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47232 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47234 \begin_inset Newline newline
47238 \begin_inset Flex URL
47241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47243 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47251 \begin_layout Bibliography
47252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47253 LatexCommand bibitem
47259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47262 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47266 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47268 \begin_inset Newline newline
47272 \begin_inset Flex URL
47275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47277 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47285 \begin_layout Bibliography
47286 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47287 LatexCommand bibitem
47293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47296 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47300 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47302 \begin_inset Newline newline
47306 \begin_inset Flex URL
47309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47311 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47319 \begin_layout Bibliography
47320 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47321 LatexCommand bibitem
47327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47330 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47334 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47336 \begin_inset Newline newline
47340 \begin_inset Flex URL
47343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47345 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47353 \begin_layout Bibliography
47354 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47355 LatexCommand bibitem
47361 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47364 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47368 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47370 \begin_inset Newline newline
47374 \begin_inset Flex URL
47377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47379 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47387 \begin_layout Bibliography
47388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47389 LatexCommand bibitem
47395 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47398 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47402 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47404 \begin_inset Newline newline
47408 \begin_inset Flex URL
47411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47413 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47421 \begin_layout Bibliography
47422 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47423 LatexCommand bibitem
47429 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47432 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47436 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47438 \begin_inset Newline newline
47442 \begin_inset Flex URL
47445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47447 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47455 \begin_layout Bibliography
47456 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47457 LatexCommand bibitem
47463 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47466 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47470 about new features in
47476 \begin_inset Newline newline
47480 \begin_inset Flex URL
47483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47485 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47493 \begin_layout Standard
47494 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47528 \begin_inset Note Note
47531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47538 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47539 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47540 bibliography is the second one:
47548 \begin_layout Standard
47549 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47550 LatexCommand bibtex
47551 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47552 options "biblio/alphadin"
47559 \begin_layout Standard
47560 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47564 \begin_layout Standard
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47566 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47572 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47573 LatexCommand printindex